1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2059 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2060 are completions available.
2065 key to accept a proposed completion.
2066 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2067 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2068 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2076 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2077 ing options for text.
2078 The special math option
2082 enables characters to be composed.
2083 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2084 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2087 , you can then input the characters
2088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2099 to a formula to get it.
2100 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2101 of the math toolbar.
2102 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2106 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2107 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2116 \begin_layout Section
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 \begin_layout Standard
2195 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2208 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2210 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2214 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2232 \begin_inset space ~
2240 \begin_inset space ~
2261 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2265 \begin_layout Labeling
2266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2271 LatexCommand nomenclature
2273 description "Tabulator key"
2279 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2280 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2287 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2294 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2298 , especially section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sub:Lists"
2311 If you are still confused, look in the
2316 \begin_inset Newline newline
2323 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2324 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2328 \begin_layout Labeling
2329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "Escape key"
2343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2350 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2351 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2354 \begin_layout Labeling
2355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 \begin_inset space ~
2372 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2373 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are three modifier keys:
2381 \begin_layout Labeling
2382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2401 LatexCommand nomenclature
2403 description "Control key"
2407 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2408 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2469 LatexCommand nomenclature
2471 description "Shift key"
2475 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2476 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2479 \begin_layout Labeling
2480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2499 LatexCommand nomenclature
2501 description "Alt or Meta key"
2505 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2506 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2507 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2513 \begin_inset Newline newline
2516 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2518 menu accelerator keys
2521 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2522 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2526 \begin_layout Standard
2527 For example, the sequence
2528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2592 manual lists all other things bound to the
2600 \begin_layout Standard
2601 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2602 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2603 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2604 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2605 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2606 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2607 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2609 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2625 followed by a capital
2632 \begin_layout Chapter
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2682 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2685 \begin_layout Subsection
2687 \begin_inset Index idx
2690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2699 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 You can select a class using the
2709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Article for basic articles
2741 \begin_layout Description
2742 Report for basic reports
2745 \begin_layout Description
2746 Book for writing a book
2749 \begin_layout Description
2750 Letter for US-style letters
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2755 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2756 will include many of these.
2757 Here are some of the classes.
2758 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2760 Special Document Classes
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2785 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2786 There are three article layouts available.
2787 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2788 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2789 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2790 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 sequential numbering
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2800 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2801 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2802 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Beamer Layout for presentations
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2811 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2819 \begin_layout Description
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2824 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2831 \begin_layout Description
2832 Foils Used to make transparencies
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2837 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2843 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2856 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2857 (Is used by this document.)
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2864 \begin_layout Description
2865 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2868 \begin_layout Description
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2881 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2883 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Slides Used to make transparencies
2890 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2896 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2906 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2912 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2913 of the document classes.
2916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 \begin_inset Index idx
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2946 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2947 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2949 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2955 and some of them, like
2959 , are highly specialized.
2960 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2961 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2963 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2964 by some document class.
2965 There are just too many of them.
2966 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2979 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2980 document class for a new file.
2981 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2986 Installing new LaTeX files
2987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 manual for information on how to install them.
2995 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3003 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3005 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3006 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3007 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3009 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3013 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3019 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3031 \begin_inset Index idx
3034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3045 chosen document class.
3046 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3047 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3074 always installed by default.
3075 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3076 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3077 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3078 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3079 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3080 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3081 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3084 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3088 \begin_inset Index idx
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Reconfiguration of LyX
3098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3101 Installing new LaTeX files
3102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3109 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3122 LyX will advise you about these things.
3130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3134 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3139 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 Document ! Local Layout
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3153 used in a variety of different documents.
3154 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3155 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3156 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3157 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3158 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3159 What you want is LyX's
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 manual for information on how to use it.
3179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Each class has a default set of options.
3185 Here's a quick table describing them:
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3197 \begin_inset Tabular
3198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3199 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3665 \begin_layout Standard
3666 You're probably also wondering what
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3679 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3680 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3685 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3690 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3700 headings, there are also
3708 headings, and so on.
3709 We will describe these headings fully in section
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3716 reference "sub:Headings"
3723 \begin_layout Subsection
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3727 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3732 \begin_inset Index idx
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 \begin_inset Index idx
3745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3754 \begin_layout Standard
3755 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3757 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3772 \begin_inset space ~
3777 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3779 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3780 to use for your document.
3781 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3785 \begin_layout Standard
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3796 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3802 \begin_inset space ~
3807 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3808 You can choose between the following five options:
3811 \begin_layout Labeling
3812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3817 Use default page style of current class.
3820 \begin_layout Labeling
3821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3826 No page numbers or headings.
3829 \begin_layout Labeling
3830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3838 \begin_layout Labeling
3839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3844 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3845 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3846 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3849 \begin_layout Labeling
3850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3855 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3856 have the LaTeX-package
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3871 How they are defined is explained in section
3872 \begin_inset space ~
3876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3878 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3887 \begin_inset space ~
3891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3893 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3900 \begin_layout Subsection
3901 Paper Size and Orientation
3902 \begin_inset Index idx
3905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 Document ! Paper size
3912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3914 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3921 \begin_layout Standard
3922 You can find the following options in the menu
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3936 \begin_inset Index idx
3939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_layout Labeling
3949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3953 \begin_inset space ~
3958 What size paper to print on.
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Itemize
3990 US letter, US legal, US executive
3993 \begin_layout Itemize
3999 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 To choose whether to output as
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_inset space ~
4033 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4034 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4037 \begin_layout Subsection
4039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_layout Standard
4069 Paper margins are set in the menu
4071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4089 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4090 the paper format and the font size into account.
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4103 That includes the paragraph environments.
4104 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4105 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4106 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4107 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4116 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4118 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4119 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4120 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4123 \begin_layout Section
4124 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4129 Paragraph ! Indentation
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4141 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4148 \begin_layout Standard
4149 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4150 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4153 \begin_layout Standard
4154 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4155 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4156 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4157 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4161 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4167 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4168 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4169 language than English.
4170 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4176 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4178 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4179 LyX takes care of that.
4180 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4182 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4183 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4184 of a page, and so on.
4188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4194 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4195 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4199 these pre-coded spacings.
4200 We will explain more later.
4203 \begin_layout Subsection
4204 Paragraph Separation
4205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4207 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4212 \begin_inset Index idx
4215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 Paragraph ! Separation
4224 \begin_layout Standard
4232 \begin_inset space ~
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4251 \begin_inset Index idx
4254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4260 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4268 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4271 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset space ~
4278 dialog and toggle the
4281 \begin_inset space ~
4286 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4289 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4293 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4294 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4300 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4303 \begin_layout Subsection
4305 \begin_inset Index idx
4308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4340 \begin_inset space ~
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4355 \begin_inset Index idx
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4364 installed to use this feature.
4369 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4373 \begin_inset space ~
4378 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4379 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4382 \begin_layout Section
4383 Paragraph Environments
4384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4386 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4395 Paragraph ! Environments
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4405 Paragraph environments|(
4413 \begin_layout Subsection
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4440 \begin_inset Newline newline
4443 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4444 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4445 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4454 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 A paragraph environment is simply a
4459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4466 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4467 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4468 scheme, labels, and so on.
4469 Additionally, you can
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4478 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4479 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4480 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4482 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4484 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4489 \begin_inset Graphics
4490 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4496 at the left end of the toolbar.
4497 LyX will change the environment of the
4501 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4502 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4503 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4507 \begin_layout Standard
4516 create a new paragraph using the
4520 paragraph environment.
4522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4529 because if you are in one of these environments:
4532 \begin_layout Itemize
4538 \begin_layout Itemize
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4579 , rather than resetting it to
4584 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4585 \begin_inset space ~
4589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4591 reference "sec:Nesting"
4598 \begin_layout Subsection
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4603 The default paragraph environment is
4608 It creates a plain paragraph.
4609 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4610 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4611 this manual) are in the
4618 \begin_layout Standard
4619 You can nest a paragraph using the
4623 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4631 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_inset Index idx
4636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4655 for thanks or contact information.
4656 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4657 page along with today's date.
4658 For other types of documents, the title
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4670 \begin_layout Standard
4671 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4685 Here's how you use them:
4688 \begin_layout Itemize
4689 Put the title of your document in the
4696 \begin_layout Itemize
4697 Put the author name in the
4704 \begin_layout Itemize
4705 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4706 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4712 Note that using this environment is optional.
4713 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4714 If you don't want a date, use the option
4716 Suppress default date on front page
4720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4721 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 \begin_inset space ~
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 You can use footnotes to insert
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 or contact information.
4743 \begin_layout Subsection
4745 \begin_inset Index idx
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4766 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Section headings ! Numbered
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4788 \begin_layout Enumerate
4794 \begin_layout Enumerate
4800 \begin_layout Enumerate
4806 \begin_layout Enumerate
4812 \begin_layout Enumerate
4818 \begin_layout Enumerate
4824 \begin_layout Enumerate
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4832 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4833 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4838 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4839 You group the book into chapters.
4840 LyX does a similar grouping:
4843 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 is divided into either
4859 \begin_layout Itemize
4871 \begin_layout Itemize
4883 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 Not all document types use the
4932 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4937 is the top-level heading.
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4950 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4951 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4953 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4967 \begin_inset Index idx
4970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4971 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The unnumbered section headings have a
4981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4988 at the end of their name.
4989 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4990 the table of contents, see section
4991 \begin_inset space ~
4995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 Changing the Numbering
5006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5008 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5017 in the Table of Contents.
5018 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5020 Just as certain classes start with
5034 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5044 This is something you can change.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5054 \begin_inset Index idx
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset space ~
5075 you will see two counters.
5080 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5082 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 Short Titles of Headings
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5092 Section headings ! Short titles
5098 \begin_inset Argument 1
5101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5110 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5117 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5119 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5120 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5121 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5126 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5127 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5128 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5139 This will insert a box labeled
5140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5144 \begin_inset space ~
5148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5151 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5152 This also works for captions inside floats.
5153 There can only be one short title per title.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 The following information applies to all section headings:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5169 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5176 \begin_layout Itemize
5177 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5184 \begin_layout Subsection
5188 \begin_layout Standard
5189 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5203 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5204 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5205 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5206 the text they contain.
5207 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5215 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5228 when you start a new paragraph.
5229 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5233 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5234 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5235 have to change back to the
5239 environment yourself.
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 \begin_inset Index idx
5254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5264 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5265 time for the differences.
5274 are identical except for one difference:
5278 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5287 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5291 Here's an example of the
5304 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5306 See – no indentation!
5310 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5311 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5312 the other paragraph.
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 Here's another example, this time in the
5323 \begin_layout Quotation
5329 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5330 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5331 the first line, then
5335 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5339 you were quoting other text.
5342 \begin_layout Quotation
5343 Here's a new paragraph.
5344 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5345 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5348 \begin_layout Standard
5349 As the examples show,
5353 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5354 They should put quotes in the
5359 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5363 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5368 \begin_inset Index idx
5371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5402 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5408 \begin_inset Newline newline
5411 Which I did not rehearse!
5415 It could be much worse.
5416 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5418 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5419 indented a bit more than the first.
5420 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5426 \begin_inset Newline newline
5429 And make things look fine
5430 \begin_inset Newline newline
5436 arg "newline-insert newline"
5442 \begin_layout Standard
5447 does not indent both margins.
5448 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5449 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5452 arg "newline-insert newline"
5458 \begin_layout Subsection
5460 \begin_inset Index idx
5463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5479 \begin_layout Standard
5480 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5490 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5499 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5500 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5501 describing some general features of all four of them.
5504 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5509 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5511 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5520 reset the environment to
5524 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5525 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5526 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5530 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5534 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5541 \begin_layout Standard
5542 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5543 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5545 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5546 you read all of section
5547 \begin_inset space ~
5551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5553 reference "sec:Nesting"
5560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5562 \begin_inset Index idx
5565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5581 \begin_layout Standard
5582 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5586 paragraph environment.
5587 It has the following properties:
5590 \begin_layout Itemize
5591 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5595 \begin_layout Itemize
5596 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5599 \begin_layout Itemize
5600 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5604 \begin_layout Itemize
5605 The items can have any length.
5606 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5607 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5614 \begin_layout Itemize
5619 environment inside another
5623 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5627 \begin_layout Itemize
5628 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5631 \begin_layout Itemize
5632 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5635 \begin_layout Itemize
5637 \begin_inset space ~
5641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5643 reference "sec:Nesting"
5647 for a full explanation of nesting.
5651 \begin_layout Standard
5652 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5661 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5664 \begin_layout Standard
5665 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5666 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5669 \begin_layout Itemize
5670 The label for the first level
5674 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5678 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 The label for the second level is a dash.
5683 \begin_layout Itemize
5684 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5688 \begin_layout Itemize
5689 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5693 \begin_layout Itemize
5694 Back out to the third level.
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5699 Back to the second level.
5703 \begin_layout Itemize
5704 Back to the outermost level.
5707 \begin_layout Standard
5708 These are the default labels for an
5713 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5715 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5718 dialog in the submenu
5723 \begin_inset Index idx
5726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5732 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5735 \begin_layout Standard
5736 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5737 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5739 \begin_inset space ~
5743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5745 reference "sec:Nesting"
5752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5754 \begin_inset Index idx
5757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5766 name "sec:Enumerate"
5773 \begin_layout Standard
5778 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5779 It has these properties:
5782 \begin_layout Enumerate
5783 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5787 \begin_layout Enumerate
5788 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5792 \begin_layout Enumerate
5793 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5796 \begin_layout Enumerate
5801 environment resets the counter to one.
5804 \begin_layout Enumerate
5817 \begin_layout Enumerate
5818 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5819 Items can have any length.
5822 \begin_layout Enumerate
5823 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5826 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5830 \begin_layout Enumerate
5831 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5835 \begin_layout Standard
5844 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5845 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5852 \begin_layout Enumerate
5853 The first level of an
5857 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5861 \begin_layout Enumerate
5862 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5866 \begin_layout Enumerate
5867 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5872 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5876 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5881 \begin_layout Enumerate
5882 Back to the third level
5886 \begin_layout Enumerate
5887 Back to the second level.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5892 Back to the outermost level.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5900 environment, see section
5901 \begin_inset space ~
5905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5907 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5912 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5915 \begin_layout Standard
5916 There is more to nesting
5920 environments than we've stated here.
5921 You should read section
5922 \begin_inset space ~
5926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5928 reference "sec:Nesting"
5932 to learn more about nesting.
5935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5937 \begin_inset Index idx
5940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5949 \begin_layout Standard
5950 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5954 list has no fixed label.
5955 Instead, LyX uses the first
5956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5963 of the first line as the label.
5967 \begin_layout Description
5968 Example: This is an example of the
5975 \begin_layout Standard
5976 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5980 \begin_layout Standard
5982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5989 it is meant that the first usage of the
5993 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5995 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6003 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6008 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6009 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6011 \begin_inset space ~
6017 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6023 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6027 for more information.) Here is an example:
6030 \begin_layout Description
6032 \begin_inset space ~
6035 Example: This one shows how to use a
6038 \begin_inset space ~
6050 \begin_layout Description
6051 Usage: You should use the
6055 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6056 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6058 It's not a good idea to use a
6062 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6063 You're better off using
6075 paragraphs into them.
6078 \begin_layout Description
6079 Nesting: You can nest
6083 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6087 \begin_layout Standard
6088 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6089 them from the first line.
6092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6094 \begin_inset Index idx
6097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6106 \begin_layout Standard
6111 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6114 \begin_layout Standard
6123 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6125 Here are its properties:
6128 \begin_layout Labeling
6129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6131 \begin_inset space ~
6134 labels LyX uses the first
6135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6142 of each line as the item label.
6147 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6148 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6149 space as described above.
6152 \begin_layout Labeling
6153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6154 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6155 the body of the item text.
6156 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6157 label width plus a little extra space.
6161 \begin_layout Labeling
6162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6164 \begin_inset space ~
6167 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6169 If the label width is larger, the label
6170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6177 into the first line.
6178 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6179 margin of the rest of the item text.
6182 \begin_layout Labeling
6183 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6185 \begin_inset space ~
6188 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6193 environment has the same left margin.
6194 \begin_inset Newline newline
6197 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6200 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6202 \begin_inset space ~
6207 dialog (toolbar button
6210 arg "layout-paragraph"
6217 \begin_inset space ~
6222 determines the default label width.
6223 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6232 multiple times instead.
6233 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6245 \begin_inset space ~
6250 every time you alter a label in a
6255 \begin_inset Newline newline
6258 The predefined default width is the length of
6259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6267 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_layout Standard
6278 list the same way as the
6282 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6288 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6292 \begin_layout Standard
6297 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6298 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6300 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6306 reference "sec:Nesting"
6310 to learn about nesting.
6313 \begin_layout Standard
6314 There is yet another feature of the
6318 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6320 You can use additional
6324 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6329 are documented in section
6330 \begin_inset space ~
6334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6336 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6341 Here are some examples:
6344 \begin_layout Labeling
6345 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6346 Left The default for
6353 \begin_layout Labeling
6354 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6355 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6362 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6365 \begin_layout Labeling
6366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6367 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6371 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6378 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6381 \begin_layout Subsection
6383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6385 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6390 \begin_inset Index idx
6393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6402 \begin_layout Standard
6403 The features described in this section require that the module
6405 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6407 is loaded in the document settings.
6408 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6413 \begin_inset Index idx
6416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6417 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6426 Custom Enumerate Lists
6427 \begin_inset Index idx
6430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6431 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6439 \begin_layout Standard
6441 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6444 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6447 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6448 There you add the command
6451 \begin_layout Standard
6459 \begin_layout Standard
6460 in TeX Code (shortcut
6470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6471 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6472 \begin_inset space ~
6476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6478 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6491 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6498 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6499 For capital Roman numerals replace
6511 in the command above.
6512 For Arabic numerals use
6520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6527 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6542 \begin_layout Standard
6544 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6552 You can only number 26
6553 \begin_inset space ~
6556 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6564 \begin_layout Standard
6565 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6566 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6569 \begin_layout Standard
6570 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6573 \begin_layout Enumerate
6574 \begin_inset Argument 1
6577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6603 \begin_layout Enumerate
6604 \begin_inset Argument 1
6607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 \begin_layout Enumerate
6635 \begin_layout Enumerate
6636 \begin_inset Argument 1
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Enumerate
6664 \begin_inset Argument 1
6667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 \begin_layout Standard
6694 For this list these commands were used:
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6708 \begin_inset Newline newline
6716 \begin_inset Newline newline
6724 \begin_inset Newline newline
6734 \begin_layout Standard
6741 makes the label emphasized and
6750 \begin_layout Standard
6751 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6759 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6760 lists until you change the definition.
6768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6770 \begin_inset Index idx
6773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6774 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6783 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6786 \begin_layout Enumerate
6787 \begin_inset Argument 1
6790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6809 \begin_inset Note Note
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 goes back to default numbering
6821 \begin_layout Enumerate
6825 \begin_layout Standard
6829 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6839 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6840 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6843 \begin_layout Standard
6844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6860 \begin_layout Standard
6861 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6863 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6864 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6865 of a normal enumeration.
6866 There, insert the command
6869 \begin_layout Standard
6875 \begin_layout Standard
6880 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6884 \begin_layout Enumerate
6888 \begin_layout Enumerate
6892 \begin_layout Standard
6893 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6896 \begin_layout Enumerate
6897 \begin_inset Argument 1
6900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 This enumeration starts at 4
6919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6921 \begin_inset Index idx
6924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6934 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6936 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6939 \begin_layout Itemize
6943 \begin_layout Itemize
6944 with standard spacing
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6948 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6950 Add there the command
6954 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6957 \begin_layout Itemize
6958 \begin_inset Argument 1
6961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6980 \begin_layout Itemize
6984 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 \begin_layout Standard
6989 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6995 \begin_inset Index idx
6998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7005 For more information see its documentation,
7006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7018 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7019 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7023 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate
7027 \begin_inset Argument 1
7030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 with negative indentation
7055 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7056 Further Customization
7057 \begin_inset Index idx
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7061 Lists ! Customization
7069 \begin_layout Standard
7070 You can also change the style of description lists.
7074 \begin_layout Standard
7080 \begin_layout Standard
7081 changes the description label font, the command
7084 \begin_layout Standard
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7091 sets the list style.
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7095 An example where the command
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7103 itshape, style=nextline
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_layout Description
7112 \begin_inset space ~
7116 \begin_inset Argument 1
7119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7125 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7127 itshape, style=nextline
7137 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7138 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7142 \begin_layout Description
7144 \begin_inset space ~
7147 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7148 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7149 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7152 \begin_layout Standard
7153 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7159 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7169 For more information see its documentation
7170 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7179 \begin_layout Subsection
7181 \begin_inset Index idx
7184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7195 \begin_inset space ~
7198 Address: An Overview
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7210 \begin_inset space ~
7216 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7217 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7218 In contrast, you can use the
7225 \begin_inset space ~
7230 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7231 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7235 \begin_layout Standard
7236 Of course, you're not limited to using
7243 \begin_inset space ~
7252 \begin_inset space ~
7257 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7258 some European academic papers.
7261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7265 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7277 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7278 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7282 \begin_inset space ~
7287 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7288 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7289 Here's an example of each:
7292 \begin_layout Right Address
7294 \begin_inset Newline newline
7298 \begin_inset Newline newline
7302 \begin_inset Newline newline
7305 When is it? What is today?
7308 \begin_layout Standard
7312 \begin_inset space ~
7318 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7319 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7320 Here's an example of the
7327 \begin_layout Address
7329 \begin_inset Newline newline
7332 Where do I send this
7333 \begin_inset Newline newline
7336 Your post office and country
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 As you can see, both
7347 \begin_inset space ~
7352 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7357 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7363 This makes sense, since
7371 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7372 Thus, you have to use
7379 arg "newline-insert newline"
7384 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7385 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7387 \begin_inset space ~
7391 \begin_inset space ~
7396 ) to start a new line in an
7403 \begin_inset space ~
7411 \begin_layout Subsection
7415 \begin_layout Standard
7416 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7417 or list of references.
7418 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7423 \begin_inset Index idx
7426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7435 \begin_layout Standard
7440 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7441 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7442 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7443 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7457 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7458 The book document classes ignores the
7462 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7466 in a letter document class.
7469 \begin_layout Standard
7474 environment does several things for you.
7475 First, it puts the centered label
7476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7484 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7486 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7487 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7488 the subsequent text.
7489 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7490 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7494 \begin_layout Standard
7495 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7499 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7500 The new paragraph will still be in the
7505 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7506 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 \begin_inset Float figure
7515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7517 \begin_inset Graphics
7518 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7526 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7531 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7552 \begin_layout Standard
7553 We would love to demonstrate the
7557 environment, but since this document is in the
7558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7565 class, we can't do this.
7566 We inserted it therefore as figure
7567 \begin_inset space ~
7571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7573 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7578 If you have never heard of an
7579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7586 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7591 \begin_inset Index idx
7594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7603 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7610 \begin_layout Standard
7615 environment is used to list references.
7616 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7617 only use it at the end of the document.
7629 \begin_layout Standard
7630 When you first open a
7634 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7650 depending on the document class.
7651 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7652 Each paragraph of the
7656 environment is a bibliography entry.
7661 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7662 Each new paragraph is still in the
7669 \begin_layout Standard
7670 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7671 by using a BibTeX database.
7672 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7673 phy handling, have a look at section
7674 \begin_inset space ~
7678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7680 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7688 Special Environments
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7693 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is a LyX extension.
7725 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7730 key as a fixed whitespace.
7734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7746 \begin_inset space ~
7751 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7764 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7766 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7769 arg "newline-insert newline"
7786 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7787 So, when you finish using the
7791 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7792 Also, you can nest the
7796 environment inside of others.
7799 \begin_layout Standard
7800 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7803 \begin_layout Itemize
7807 arg "newline-insert newline"
7810 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7815 \begin_inset space \space{}
7825 arg "newline-insert newline"
7831 \begin_layout Itemize
7835 arg "newline-insert newline"
7845 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7851 \begin_layout Itemize
7852 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7853 You must put at least one
7857 in any line you want blank.
7858 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7861 \begin_layout Itemize
7862 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7866 since that will insert
7871 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7874 arg "self-insert \""
7880 \begin_layout Standard
7884 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7888 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7892 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7896 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7900 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7901 printf("Hello World!
7906 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7910 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7914 \begin_layout Standard
7915 This is just the standard
7916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7932 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7934 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7935 as if you used a typewriter.
7936 \begin_inset Index idx
7939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7940 Paragraph environments|)
7945 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7948 Program Code Listings
7953 \begin_inset space ~
7961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7965 \begin_inset Index idx
7968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7982 environment is similar to the
7986 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
7987 computer console text.
7992 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8005 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8006 you can have empty lines.
8018 \begin_layout Itemize
8019 have a certain language and a text style
8022 \begin_layout Itemize
8023 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8024 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8028 \begin_layout Standard
8029 Because of these properties
8033 works like a typewriter.
8037 \begin_layout Verbatim
8042 \begin_layout Verbatim
8046 The following 2 lines are empty:
8049 \begin_layout Verbatim
8053 \begin_layout Verbatim
8057 \begin_layout Verbatim
8059 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8064 \begin_layout Section
8065 Nesting Environments
8066 \begin_inset Index idx
8069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8070 Nesting ! Environments
8076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8085 \begin_layout Subsection
8089 \begin_layout Standard
8090 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8092 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8094 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8096 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8108 \begin_layout Enumerate
8112 \begin_layout Enumerate
8117 \begin_layout Enumerate
8121 \begin_layout Enumerate
8126 \begin_layout Enumerate
8130 \begin_layout Standard
8131 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8132 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8134 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8136 \begin_inset space ~
8140 \begin_inset space ~
8148 \begin_inset space ~
8152 \begin_inset space ~
8157 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8159 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8162 arg "depth-increment"
8168 arg "depth-decrement"
8182 arg "depth-increment"
8188 arg "depth-decrement"
8192 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8193 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8197 \begin_layout Standard
8198 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8199 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8200 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8201 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8204 \begin_layout Standard
8205 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8206 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8208 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8211 \begin_layout Subsection
8212 What You Can and Can't Nest
8215 \begin_layout Standard
8216 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8217 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8220 \begin_layout Standard
8221 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8222 than a simple yes or no.
8223 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8226 \begin_layout Itemize
8227 Completely unnestable
8230 \begin_layout Itemize
8231 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8235 \begin_layout Itemize
8236 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8240 \begin_layout Standard
8241 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8242 environments have them:
8245 \begin_layout Description
8246 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8247 Can't nest into them.
8251 \begin_layout Itemize
8257 \begin_layout Itemize
8263 \begin_layout Itemize
8269 \begin_layout Itemize
8275 \begin_layout Itemize
8282 \begin_layout Description
8284 \begin_inset space ~
8287 Nestable You can nest them.
8288 You can nest other things into them.
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 \begin_layout Itemize
8304 \begin_layout Itemize
8310 \begin_layout Itemize
8316 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8328 \begin_layout Itemize
8334 \begin_layout Itemize
8340 \begin_layout Itemize
8347 \begin_layout Description
8348 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8349 You can't nest anything into them.
8353 \begin_layout Itemize
8359 \begin_layout Itemize
8365 \begin_layout Itemize
8371 \begin_layout Itemize
8377 \begin_layout Itemize
8383 \begin_layout Itemize
8389 \begin_layout Itemize
8395 \begin_layout Itemize
8401 \begin_layout Itemize
8407 \begin_layout Itemize
8413 \begin_layout Itemize
8419 \begin_layout Itemize
8425 \begin_layout Itemize
8431 \begin_layout Itemize
8435 \begin_inset space ~
8441 \begin_layout Itemize
8448 \begin_layout Standard
8449 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8457 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8470 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8471 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8472 nested section headings violate this.
8480 \begin_layout Subsection
8481 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8482 \begin_inset Index idx
8485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8486 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8494 \begin_layout Standard
8495 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8496 affected by nesting anyhow.
8500 \begin_layout Itemize
8504 \begin_layout Itemize
8508 \begin_layout Itemize
8512 \begin_layout Standard
8514 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8522 Figures and tables in
8526 are not affected by this.
8531 Have a look at section
8532 \begin_inset space ~
8536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8538 reference "sec:Floats"
8542 for more information about
8549 \begin_layout Standard
8550 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8551 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8555 \begin_layout Standard
8556 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8564 of its own, it behaves just like a
8565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8572 paragraph environment.
8573 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8577 \begin_layout Standard
8578 Here's an example with a table:
8581 \begin_layout Enumerate
8586 \begin_layout Enumerate
8587 This is (a) and it's nested.
8591 \begin_layout Standard
8592 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8598 \begin_layout Standard
8600 \begin_inset Tabular
8601 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8602 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8603 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8604 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8688 \begin_layout Standard
8689 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8696 \begin_layout Enumerate
8698 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8702 \begin_layout Enumerate
8706 \begin_layout Standard
8707 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8710 \begin_layout Enumerate
8715 \begin_layout Enumerate
8716 This is (a) and it's nested.
8720 \begin_layout Standard
8721 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8727 \begin_layout Standard
8729 \begin_inset Tabular
8730 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8731 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8732 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8733 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8817 \begin_layout Standard
8818 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8824 \begin_layout Enumerate
8831 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8834 \begin_layout Enumerate
8838 \begin_layout Standard
8839 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8844 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8846 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8849 \begin_layout Enumerate
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate
8855 This is (a) and it's nested.
8858 \begin_layout Standard
8859 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8865 \begin_layout Standard
8867 \begin_inset Tabular
8868 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8869 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8870 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8871 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8956 \begin_layout Standard
8957 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8963 \begin_layout Enumerate
8965 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8972 \begin_layout Enumerate
8976 \begin_layout Standard
8977 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8983 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8984 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8988 \begin_layout Subsection
8989 Usage and General Features
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8993 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9002 is the innermost possible depth.
9003 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9006 \begin_layout Enumerate
9007 level #1 – outermost
9011 \begin_layout Enumerate
9016 \begin_layout Enumerate
9021 \begin_layout Enumerate
9026 \begin_layout Itemize
9031 \begin_layout Itemize
9040 \begin_layout Standard
9041 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9042 both of them in the example.
9043 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9053 For example, if we tried to nest another
9058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9065 , we would get errors.
9068 \begin_layout Subsection
9070 \begin_inset Index idx
9073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9082 \begin_layout Standard
9083 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9084 We have several examples of nested environments.
9085 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9090 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9093 \begin_layout Labeling
9094 \labelwidthstring MMM
9095 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9104 \begin_layout Labeling
9105 \labelwidthstring MMM
9106 #2-a This is level #2.
9107 We created it by using
9110 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9116 arg "depth-increment"
9123 \begin_layout Labeling
9124 \labelwidthstring MMM
9125 #3-a This is level #3.
9126 This time, we just enter
9133 arg "depth-increment"
9137 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9141 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9147 arg "depth-increment"
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9159 environment, nested inside of
9160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9168 So, it's at level #4.
9169 We did this by entering
9172 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9178 arg "depth-increment"
9181 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9186 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9202 \begin_layout Standard
9207 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9210 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9216 \begin_layout Labeling
9217 \labelwidthstring MMM
9218 #4-a This is level #4.
9222 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9225 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9230 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9234 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9239 keep nesting things inside
9240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9251 \begin_layout Labeling
9252 \labelwidthstring MMM
9253 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9258 \begin_layout Labeling
9259 \labelwidthstring MMM
9260 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9261 and this is level #6.
9262 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9266 \begin_layout Labeling
9267 \labelwidthstring MMM
9268 #5-b Back to level #5.
9272 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9278 arg "depth-decrement"
9285 \begin_layout Labeling
9286 \labelwidthstring MMM
9290 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9296 arg "depth-decrement"
9299 , we're back at level #4.
9303 \begin_layout Labeling
9304 \labelwidthstring MMM
9305 #3-b Back to level #3.
9306 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9310 \begin_layout Labeling
9311 \labelwidthstring MMM
9312 #2-b Back to level #2.
9317 \begin_layout Labeling
9318 \labelwidthstring MMM
9319 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9320 After this sentence, we will enter
9324 and change the paragraph environment back to
9331 \begin_layout Standard
9332 We could have also used the
9348 environment in place of the
9353 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9357 Example 2: Inheritance
9360 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9361 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9364 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9373 arg "depth-increment"
9377 \begin_inset Newline newline
9380 which, we will change to the
9388 \begin_layout Enumerate
9393 environment, at level #2.
9396 \begin_layout Enumerate
9397 Notice how the nested
9401 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9405 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9409 \begin_layout Standard
9410 We ended this example by entering
9415 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9419 and reset the nesting depth by using
9422 arg "depth-decrement"
9428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9429 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9438 \begin_inset Argument 1
9441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9442 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9450 \begin_layout Enumerate
9451 This is level #1, in an
9455 paragraph environment.
9456 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9460 \begin_layout Enumerate
9465 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9471 arg "depth-increment"
9475 Now, what happens if we nest an
9479 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9480 label be? An asterisk?
9484 \begin_layout Itemize
9494 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9495 So, its label is a bullet.
9496 (We got here by using
9499 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9505 arg "depth-increment"
9508 , then changing the environment to
9516 \begin_layout Itemize
9517 Here's level #4, produced using
9520 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9526 arg "depth-increment"
9530 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9535 \begin_layout Enumerate
9536 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9538 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9543 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9547 , because we are in the
9555 environment (that is, it is an
9570 \begin_layout Enumerate
9575 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9576 type of numbering does LyX use?
9579 \begin_layout Enumerate
9580 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9583 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9586 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9589 \begin_layout Enumerate
9593 arg "depth-decrement"
9596 to decrease the depth after the next
9599 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9606 \begin_layout Enumerate
9608 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9612 \begin_layout Enumerate
9614 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9615 numeral as the label.Why?
9618 \begin_layout Enumerate
9619 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9628 Notice, however, that LyX
9632 reset the counter for the label.
9636 \begin_layout Enumerate
9640 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9646 arg "depth-decrement"
9649 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9650 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9651 into the twofold-nested
9659 \begin_layout Enumerate
9660 The same thing happens if we do another
9663 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9669 arg "depth-decrement"
9672 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9675 \begin_layout Standard
9676 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9681 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9695 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9701 The same rule applies for the
9705 environment, as well.
9708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9709 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9712 \begin_layout Enumerate
9713 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9714 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9715 the same detail with how we did it.
9724 \begin_layout Standard
9732 arg "depth-increment"
9739 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9740 the example in parentheses someplace.
9741 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9742 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9743 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9747 \begin_layout Enumerate
9752 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9757 Now we will add verse.
9758 \begin_inset Newline newline
9761 It will get much worse.
9762 \begin_inset Newline newline
9772 arg "depth-increment"
9783 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9784 \begin_inset Newline newline
9787 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9788 \begin_inset Newline newline
9794 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9807 \begin_layout Standard
9808 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9814 \begin_layout Standard
9816 \begin_inset Tabular
9817 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9818 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9909 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9919 arg "depth-increment"
9925 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9931 \begin_inset Newline newline
9939 arg "depth-decrement"
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9951 : level #1) This is another item.
9952 Note that selecting a
9956 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9957 3 times to put the table inside the
9965 \begin_layout Quotation
9966 We're now ending the
9970 list and changing to
9975 We're still at level #1.
9976 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9977 The next set of paragraphs is a
9978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9985 We will nest both the
9992 \begin_inset space ~
9997 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10001 for the letter body.
10005 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10008 to preserve the depth.
10009 Remember that you need to use
10012 arg "newline-insert newline"
10015 to create multiple lines inside the
10022 \begin_inset space ~
10032 \begin_layout Right Address
10034 \begin_inset Newline newline
10037 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10038 \begin_inset Newline newline
10044 \begin_layout Address
10046 \begin_inset space ~
10052 \begin_layout Quotation
10053 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10057 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10058 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10059 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10060 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10061 as soon as possible.
10062 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10065 \begin_layout Quotation
10066 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10067 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10068 with your order, along with payment.
10071 \begin_layout Quotation
10072 We thank you again for your patience.
10075 \begin_layout Address
10077 \begin_inset Newline newline
10084 \begin_layout Quotation
10085 That ends that example!
10088 \begin_layout Standard
10089 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10090 just a few keystrokes.
10091 We could have easily nested an
10112 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10115 \begin_layout Subsection
10117 \begin_inset Index idx
10120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10121 Nesting ! Separation
10127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10129 name "sub:Separate-Nestings"
10136 \begin_layout Standard
10137 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10139 For example you need two different enumerations:
10142 \begin_layout Enumerate
10147 \begin_layout Enumerate
10152 \begin_layout Enumerate
10156 \begin_layout --Separator--
10160 \begin_layout Itemize
10166 \begin_layout --Separator--
10170 \begin_layout Enumerate
10174 \begin_layout Enumerate
10178 \begin_layout Enumerate
10182 \begin_layout Standard
10183 To tell LyX that there are two lists an not one, set the cursor at the end
10184 of the last item and use the menu
10186 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10187 Start New Parent Environment
10190 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10191 If you use instead the menu
10193 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10194 Start New Environment
10196 a new list will also be created, but in the same besting level.
10199 \begin_layout Standard
10200 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10204 arg "paragraph-break"
10211 in the pull-down box for environments in LyX's main toolbar.
10214 \begin_layout Section
10215 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10216 \begin_inset Index idx
10219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10228 \begin_layout Standard
10229 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10230 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10231 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10232 be broken at the end of a line.
10233 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10237 \begin_layout Subsection
10239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10241 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10246 \begin_inset Index idx
10249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10258 \begin_layout Standard
10259 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10260 line at that point.
10261 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10264 \begin_layout Quote
10265 Further documentation is given in section
10266 \begin_inset Newline newline
10270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10272 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10280 \begin_layout Standard
10281 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10296 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10305 A protected space is set with
10307 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10308 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10310 \begin_inset space ~
10318 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10324 \begin_layout Subsection
10326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10328 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10333 \begin_inset Index idx
10336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10337 Spacing ! Horizontal
10345 \begin_layout Standard
10346 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10348 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10349 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10353 The length units are listed in Appendix
10354 \begin_inset space ~
10358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10360 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10371 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10376 \begin_inset Index idx
10379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10380 Spaces ! Inter-word
10388 \begin_layout Standard
10389 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10390 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10391 at the ends of sentences.
10392 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10393 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10394 followed by a period; see section
10395 \begin_inset space ~
10399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10401 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10406 To insert a normal space, select
10408 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10409 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10411 \begin_inset space ~
10419 arg "space-insert normal"
10425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10429 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10434 \begin_inset Index idx
10437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10446 \begin_layout Standard
10448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10455 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10464 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10465 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10466 inside abbreviations:
10469 \begin_layout Quote
10471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10475 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10478 \begin_layout Standard
10479 or between values and units.
10480 Compare for example this:
10481 \begin_inset Newline newline
10485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10489 \begin_inset Newline newline
10492 10 kg (normal space
10495 \begin_layout Standard
10496 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10498 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10499 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10501 \begin_inset space ~
10509 arg "space-insert thin"
10515 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10519 \begin_layout Standard
10520 You can also insert the following space types:
10523 \begin_layout Description
10525 \begin_inset space ~
10529 \begin_inset space ~
10532 space A line with a
10533 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10537 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10541 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10544 negative thin space between the arrows.
10547 \begin_layout Description
10549 \begin_inset space ~
10553 \begin_inset space ~
10556 space A line with a
10557 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10561 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10565 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10568 negative medium space between the arrows.
10571 \begin_layout Description
10573 \begin_inset space ~
10577 \begin_inset space ~
10580 space A line with a
10581 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10585 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10589 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10592 negative thick space between the arrows.
10595 \begin_layout Description
10597 \begin_inset space ~
10601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10605 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10609 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10613 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10617 \begin_inset space ~
10621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10624 em) space between the arrows.
10627 \begin_layout Description
10629 \begin_inset space ~
10633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10637 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10641 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10645 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10649 \begin_inset space ~
10653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10656 em) space between the arrows.
10659 \begin_layout Description
10661 \begin_inset space ~
10665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10669 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10673 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10677 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10681 \begin_inset space ~
10685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10688 em) space between the arrows.
10691 \begin_layout Description
10693 \begin_inset space ~
10697 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10701 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10706 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10713 cm space between the arrows.
10716 \begin_layout Standard
10718 \begin_inset space ~
10722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10724 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10728 lists the different space sizes.
10731 \begin_layout Standard
10732 \begin_inset Float table
10737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10738 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10743 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10747 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10757 \begin_inset Tabular
10758 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10759 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10760 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10761 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10877 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10881 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11036 \begin_inset Index idx
11039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11048 \begin_layout Standard
11049 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
11050 in a uniform fashion.
11051 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11052 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11053 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11054 equally between themselves.
11057 \begin_layout Standard
11058 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11061 \begin_layout Quote
11063 This is on the left side
11064 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11067 This is on the right
11070 \begin_layout Quote
11073 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11077 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11083 \begin_layout Quote
11086 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11090 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11094 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11100 \begin_layout Standard
11101 That was an example in the
11107 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11111 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11115 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11118 is one in a standard paragraph.
11119 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11123 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11126 \begin_layout Standard
11127 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11130 \begin_inset space ~
11135 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11138 \begin_layout Standard
11140 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11144 \begin_inset space ~
11150 \begin_layout Standard
11152 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11156 \begin_inset space ~
11162 \begin_layout Standard
11164 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11168 \begin_inset space ~
11174 \begin_layout Standard
11176 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11180 \begin_inset space ~
11186 \begin_layout Standard
11188 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11192 \begin_inset space ~
11198 \begin_layout Standard
11200 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11204 \begin_inset space ~
11210 \begin_layout Standard
11211 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11219 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11223 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11224 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11225 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11229 option in the space dialog.
11237 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11241 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11246 \begin_inset Index idx
11249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 \begin_layout Standard
11259 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11260 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11263 \begin_layout Standard
11264 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11267 What is correct English?:
11268 \begin_inset Newline newline
11272 \begin_inset Newline newline
11276 \begin_inset space ~
11279 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11280 \begin_inset Newline newline
11284 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11295 \begin_inset Newline newline
11299 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11310 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11316 \begin_layout Standard
11318 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11323 \begin_inset space ~
11327 \begin_inset space ~
11331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11335 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11337 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11338 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11342 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11348 \begin_inset space ~
11352 \begin_inset space ~
11356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11359 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11368 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11369 That is why it is named
11370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11378 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11379 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11383 \begin_layout Subsection
11385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11387 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11392 \begin_inset Index idx
11395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11404 \begin_layout Standard
11405 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11407 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11408 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11410 \begin_inset space ~
11416 There you find the following sizes:
11419 \begin_layout Standard
11432 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11437 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11439 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11440 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11442 \begin_inset space ~
11448 \begin_inset Index idx
11451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11452 Document ! Settings
11457 for the paragraph separation.
11458 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11469 \begin_layout Standard
11475 \begin_inset Index idx
11478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11484 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11485 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11490 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11491 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11500 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11509 s are described in section
11510 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11516 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11525 If there are several
11529 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11530 You can therefore use
11534 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11537 \begin_layout Standard
11542 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11543 \begin_inset space ~
11547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11549 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11556 \begin_layout Standard
11557 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11567 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11568 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11580 \begin_layout Subsection
11581 Paragraph Alignment
11582 \begin_inset Index idx
11585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11586 Paragraph ! Alignment
11594 \begin_layout Standard
11595 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11597 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11600 dialog (toolbar button
11603 arg "layout-paragraph"
11607 There are five possibilities:
11610 \begin_layout Itemize
11618 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11624 \begin_layout Itemize
11632 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11638 \begin_layout Itemize
11646 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11652 \begin_layout Itemize
11660 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11666 \begin_layout Itemize
11674 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11680 \begin_layout Standard
11681 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11682 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11683 the left and right margins.
11684 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11687 \begin_layout Standard
11689 This paragraph is right aligned,
11692 \begin_layout Standard
11694 this one is centered,
11697 \begin_layout Standard
11699 this one is left aligned.
11702 \begin_layout Subsection
11704 \begin_inset Index idx
11707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11708 Page breaks ! Forced
11714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11716 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11723 \begin_layout Standard
11724 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11725 can force a page break where you want one.
11726 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11727 Only if you use a lot of
11731 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11734 \begin_layout Standard
11735 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11736 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11740 have to change the page breaking.
11743 \begin_layout Standard
11744 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11746 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11748 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11749 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11751 \begin_inset space ~
11757 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11759 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11760 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11762 \begin_inset space ~
11767 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11769 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11770 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11773 \begin_layout Standard
11774 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11775 at the top of a page.
11776 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11777 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11778 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11779 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11783 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11787 to learn more about
11794 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11798 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11803 \begin_inset Index idx
11806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11807 Page breaks ! Clear
11815 \begin_layout Standard
11816 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11817 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11818 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11819 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11820 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11823 \begin_layout Standard
11824 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11826 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11827 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11829 \begin_inset space ~
11835 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11837 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11838 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11840 \begin_inset space ~
11844 \begin_inset space ~
11849 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11850 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11853 \begin_layout Subsection
11855 \begin_inset Index idx
11858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11865 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11867 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11874 \begin_layout Standard
11875 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11877 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11879 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11880 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11882 \begin_inset space ~
11886 \begin_inset space ~
11894 arg "newline-insert newline"
11898 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11900 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11901 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11903 \begin_inset space ~
11907 \begin_inset space ~
11915 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11918 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11920 This is useful to avoid
11921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11928 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11931 \begin_layout Standard
11932 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11933 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11934 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11935 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11936 \begin_inset space ~
11940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11942 reference "sec:Quote"
11947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11949 reference "sec:Verse"
11954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11956 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11963 \begin_layout Subsection
11965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11967 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11972 \begin_inset Index idx
11975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11984 \begin_layout Standard
11986 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11997 \begin_layout Standard
12001 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12002 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12004 \begin_inset space ~
12009 you can insert horizontal lines.
12010 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12011 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12012 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12015 \begin_layout Standard
12017 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12028 \begin_layout Section
12029 Characters and Symbols
12032 \begin_layout Standard
12033 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12034 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12035 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12043 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
12047 for information on how this is done.
12050 \begin_layout Standard
12051 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12056 dialog via the menu
12058 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12059 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12065 \begin_layout Standard
12066 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12074 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12075 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
12076 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12084 \begin_layout Section
12085 Fonts and Text Styles
12086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12088 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12095 \begin_layout Subsection
12097 \begin_inset Index idx
12100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12109 \begin_layout Standard
12110 There are two types of fonts:
12113 \begin_layout Description
12115 \begin_inset space ~
12119 \begin_inset Index idx
12122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12128 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12133 characters) in the font.
12134 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12135 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12136 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12137 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12138 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12139 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12140 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12141 \begin_inset Newline newline
12144 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12145 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12146 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12147 sizes than at small ones.
12148 \begin_inset Newline newline
12162 \begin_inset space ~
12170 \begin_layout Description
12172 \begin_inset space ~
12176 \begin_inset Index idx
12179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12185 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12186 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12187 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12188 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12189 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12190 image manipulation program.
12191 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12192 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12196 pixels high up to 34
12197 \begin_inset space ~
12200 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12201 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12202 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12204 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12205 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12206 \begin_inset Newline newline
12209 Bitmap fonts are named
12212 \begin_inset space ~
12217 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12220 \begin_layout Standard
12221 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12222 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12223 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12224 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12225 use scalable fonts.
12228 \begin_layout Standard
12229 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12232 \begin_layout Standard
12233 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12234 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12235 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12236 font to emphasize text, you use an
12237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12245 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12246 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12250 \begin_layout Subsection
12252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12254 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12261 \begin_layout Standard
12262 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12263 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12264 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12266 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12267 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12268 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12269 to a word processor.
12270 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12271 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12272 across different machines.
12273 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12274 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12276 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12278 \begin_inset space ~
12282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12284 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12289 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12290 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12293 \begin_layout Standard
12294 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12295 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12297 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12298 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12299 that is installed on your system.
12300 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12303 \begin_layout Standard
12304 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12312 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12313 es; so you might have to experiment.
12321 \begin_layout Standard
12322 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12330 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12331 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12339 \begin_layout Subsection
12340 Document Font and Font size
12341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12343 name "sub:Document-Font"
12348 \begin_inset Index idx
12351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12358 \begin_inset Index idx
12361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12370 \begin_layout Standard
12371 You can set the document fonts in the
12373 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12377 \begin_inset Index idx
12380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12381 Document ! Settings
12391 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12392 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12395 \begin_inset space ~
12404 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12406 \begin_inset space ~
12409 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12412 \begin_layout Standard
12419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12428 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12429 This requires that you use
12435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12474 as the output format, i.
12475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12479 \begin_inset space \space{}
12482 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12483 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12489 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12494 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12495 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12497 \begin_inset space ~
12500 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12501 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12502 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12504 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12507 \begin_layout Standard
12508 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12513 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12518 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12519 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12526 \begin_inset space ~
12532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12545 European Computer Modern
12548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12555 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12558 \begin_layout Standard
12567 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12568 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12573 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12576 \begin_inset space ~
12581 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12587 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12588 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12591 \begin_layout Itemize
12595 \begin_inset space ~
12600 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12613 \begin_inset space ~
12618 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12622 as the default font.
12623 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12624 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12627 \begin_inset space ~
12640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12641 One difference is improved kerning.
12649 \begin_layout Itemize
12653 \begin_inset space ~
12657 \begin_inset space ~
12662 fonts in (the rare) case that
12665 \begin_inset space ~
12670 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12685 Virtual means that it
12686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12697 -glyphs from other fonts.
12698 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12720 Loading the LaTeX-package
12725 \begin_inset Index idx
12728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12729 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12734 with the document preamble line
12735 \begin_inset Newline newline
12742 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12743 \begin_inset Newline newline
12748 will fix the guillemet problem.
12753 and that accented characters are not
12757 glyph, but built of
12761 characters, the accent and the letter.
12762 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12768 If you search for example for the French word
12769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12776 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12785 and not for the glyph
12786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12790 \begin_inset space ~
12794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12800 \begin_layout Itemize
12801 If you do not like the look of
12809 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12814 \begin_inset space ~
12820 \begin_inset space ~
12830 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12831 \begin_inset space ~
12834 serif and typewriter fonts,
12838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12839 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12846 \begin_inset space ~
12855 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12860 \begin_inset space \space{}
12868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12872 \begin_inset space \space{}
12878 \begin_inset space ~
12886 \begin_inset space ~
12896 but you can also select your own.
12897 \begin_inset Newline newline
12900 The differences between roman,
12903 \begin_inset space ~
12912 fonts are explained in section
12913 \begin_inset space ~
12917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12919 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12924 \begin_inset Newline newline
12930 \begin_inset space ~
12935 was originally designed for newspapers.
12936 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12937 into the small newspaper columns.
12941 \begin_inset space ~
12946 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12949 \begin_layout Standard
12950 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12963 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12968 depends on the class you are using.
12969 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12972 \begin_layout Standard
12973 Note that the font size is the
12978 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12979 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12980 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12983 \begin_inset space ~
12989 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12990 \begin_inset space ~
12994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12996 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13003 \begin_layout Standard
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13012 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13014 \begin_inset space ~
13017 serif or typewriter.
13022 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13032 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13035 \begin_layout Standard
13044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13053 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13059 \begin_inset Index idx
13062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13063 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
13069 \begin_inset space ~
13073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13075 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
13080 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13081 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13088 \begin_layout Standard
13089 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13091 Use Old Style Figures
13095 Use True Small Caps
13098 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13101 Use Old Style Figures
13103 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13105 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13113 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13117 Use True Small Caps
13119 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13120 of scaled capitals.
13121 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13122 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13125 \begin_layout Standard
13130 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13131 a font to display the script characters.
13135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13136 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13141 \begin_inset Index idx
13144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13145 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13150 So this has no effect for the document language
13164 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13168 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13176 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13180 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13181 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13182 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13184 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13187 dialog, see section
13188 \begin_inset space ~
13192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13194 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13206 \begin_layout Subsection
13210 \begin_layout Standard
13211 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13213 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13214 choose a math font in the dialog
13216 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13220 \begin_inset Index idx
13223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13224 Document ! Settings
13230 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13231 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13232 default font family
13233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13239 \begin_inset space ~
13245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13249 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13250 the document font is available.
13253 \begin_layout Standard
13254 Note that the math font will not be used for
13258 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13264 or by the insertion of the command
13271 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13272 \begin_inset space ~
13276 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13277 while the math characters do not.
13279 \begin_inset space ~
13282 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13285 \begin_inset space ~
13293 \begin_inset space ~
13298 in the document font settings.
13301 \begin_layout Standard
13302 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13303 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13310 \begin_inset space ~
13316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13319 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13327 \begin_inset space ~
13333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13339 \begin_layout Subsection
13340 Using Different Character Styles
13341 \begin_inset Index idx
13344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13351 \begin_inset Index idx
13354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13363 \begin_layout Standard
13364 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13365 certain paragraph environments.
13366 LyX supports two character styles,
13375 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13379 \begin_layout Standard
13384 style, do one of the following:
13387 \begin_layout Itemize
13388 click on the toolbar button
13397 \begin_layout Itemize
13398 use the key binding
13407 \begin_layout Standard
13408 These commands are all toggles.
13413 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13416 \begin_layout Standard
13417 One typically uses the
13421 style for proper names.
13423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13430 is the original author of LyX.
13431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13437 \begin_layout Standard
13438 A more widely used character style is the
13443 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13450 \begin_layout Itemize
13451 clicking on the toolbar button
13460 \begin_layout Itemize
13461 using the keybindings
13470 \begin_layout Standard
13475 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13476 es use a different font.
13479 \begin_layout Standard
13480 We've been using the
13484 style all over the place in this document.
13485 Here's one more example:
13488 \begin_layout Quotation
13491 Do not overuse character styles!
13494 \begin_layout Standard
13495 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13496 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13497 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13498 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13502 \begin_layout Standard
13503 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13511 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13513 \begin_inset space ~
13516 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13522 arg "dialog-show character"
13528 \begin_layout Subsection
13529 Fine-Tuning with the
13534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13536 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13541 \begin_inset Index idx
13544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13553 \begin_layout Standard
13554 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13555 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13556 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13557 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13558 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13559 from ordinary dialog.
13562 \begin_layout Standard
13563 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13564 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13565 \begin_inset Newline newline
13568 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13569 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13572 \begin_layout Standard
13573 To use custom character styles, open the
13575 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13577 \begin_inset space ~
13580 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13583 dialog or press the toolbar button
13586 arg "dialog-show character"
13590 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13591 font property that you can choose.
13592 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13595 \begin_inset space ~
13600 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13605 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13606 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13607 environments all at once.
13610 \begin_layout Standard
13611 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13614 \begin_inset space ~
13626 \begin_layout Labeling
13627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13641 The possible options are:
13645 \begin_layout Labeling
13646 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13651 This is the Roman font family.
13652 Normally a serif font.
13653 It's also the default family.
13663 \begin_layout Labeling
13664 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13668 \begin_inset space ~
13675 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13687 \begin_layout Labeling
13688 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13695 This is the Typewriter font family.
13701 arg "font-typewriter"
13710 \begin_layout Labeling
13711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13716 This corresponds to the print weight.
13721 \begin_layout Labeling
13722 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13727 This is the Medium font series.
13728 It's also the default series.
13731 \begin_layout Labeling
13732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13739 This is the Bold font series.
13752 \begin_layout Labeling
13753 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13758 As the name implies.
13763 \begin_layout Labeling
13764 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13769 This is the Upright font shape.
13770 It's also the default shape.
13773 \begin_layout Labeling
13774 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13788 s the Italic font shape
13794 \begin_layout Labeling
13795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13802 This is the Slanted font shape
13804 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13807 \begin_layout Labeling
13808 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13812 \begin_inset space ~
13819 This is the Small caps font shape
13826 \begin_layout Labeling
13827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13832 Alters the text color.
13833 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13837 \begin_inset space ~
13842 , which means that the document default color set in
13844 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13845 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13851 \begin_inset space ~
13856 is used, you can choose between
13889 \begin_inset Index idx
13892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13901 \begin_layout Labeling
13902 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13907 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13908 the language of the document.
13909 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13911 \begin_inset Newline newline
13914 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13915 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13916 When using the spell checking (see section
13917 \begin_inset space ~
13921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13923 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13927 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13930 \begin_layout Labeling
13931 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13936 Alters the size of the font.
13937 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13938 proportional to the document font size.
13939 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13940 what you want to do.
13945 \begin_layout Labeling
13946 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13967 arg "font-size tiny"
13973 \begin_layout Labeling
13974 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13995 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14001 \begin_layout Labeling
14002 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14023 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14029 \begin_layout Labeling
14030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14051 arg "font-size small"
14057 \begin_layout Labeling
14058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14072 It's also the default size.
14076 arg "font-size normal"
14082 \begin_layout Labeling
14083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14104 arg "font-size large"
14110 \begin_layout Labeling
14111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14132 arg "font-size larger"
14138 \begin_layout Labeling
14139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14160 arg "font-size largest"
14166 \begin_layout Labeling
14167 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14188 arg "font-size huge"
14194 \begin_layout Labeling
14195 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14216 arg "font-size giant"
14222 \begin_layout Labeling
14223 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14228 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14248 arg "font-size increase"
14254 \begin_layout Labeling
14255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14260 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14280 arg "font-size decrease"
14287 \begin_layout Standard
14292 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14293 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14294 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14295 — use those instead.
14296 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14299 \begin_layout Labeling
14300 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14305 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14310 \begin_layout Labeling
14311 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14318 This is text with emphasize on
14321 This might seem like the same as
14325 , but it is actually a bit different.
14331 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14333 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14336 \begin_layout Labeling
14337 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14344 This is text with Underbar on.
14350 arg "font-underline"
14356 \begin_inset Newline newline
14361 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14362 when you could not change fonts.
14363 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14364 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14368 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14371 \begin_layout Labeling
14372 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14376 \begin_inset space ~
14383 This is text with Double underbar on.
14389 arg "font-underunderline"
14393 \begin_inset Newline newline
14396 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14397 about double underbar.
14400 \begin_layout Labeling
14401 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14405 \begin_inset space ~
14412 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14418 arg "font-underwave"
14422 \begin_inset Newline newline
14425 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14426 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14429 \begin_layout Labeling
14430 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14437 This is text with Strikeout on.
14443 arg "font-strikeout"
14447 \begin_inset Newline newline
14450 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14451 changed in the meantime.
14454 \begin_layout Labeling
14455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14462 This is text with Noun on.
14469 , this is a logical attribute.
14470 Normally it's equivalent to
14473 \begin_inset space ~
14482 \begin_layout Standard
14483 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14484 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14486 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14488 \begin_inset space ~
14491 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14497 arg "dialog-show character"
14500 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14501 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14504 arg "textstyle-apply"
14508 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14512 \begin_layout Standard
14513 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14520 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14521 (suppose you just set the shape to
14522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14540 \begin_inset space ~
14552 \begin_layout Standard
14553 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14561 \begin_inset space ~
14573 \begin_layout Itemize
14579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14586 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14604 \begin_inset Newline newline
14608 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14622 \begin_inset Note Note
14625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14626 For more on phantoms see section
14627 \begin_inset space ~
14631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14633 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14643 \begin_inset Newline newline
14649 \begin_layout Itemize
14654 fonts use characters with serifs.
14655 These are the small
14656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14663 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14664 The following example shows the difference:
14665 \begin_inset Newline newline
14669 \begin_inset Newline newline
14674 text without serifs
14677 \begin_inset Newline newline
14680 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14681 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14688 \begin_layout Itemize
14693 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14694 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14695 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14698 \begin_layout Standard
14699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14706 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14707 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14710 \begin_inset space ~
14715 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14716 the property to be removed.
14717 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14718 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14719 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14737 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14738 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14746 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14750 \begin_inset space ~
14755 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14766 If you, for example, set
14767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14785 \begin_inset space ~
14790 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14799 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14802 \begin_layout Standard
14803 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14804 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14807 \begin_layout Section
14808 Printing and Previewing
14811 \begin_layout Subsection
14815 \begin_layout Standard
14816 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14817 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14818 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14819 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14820 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14822 Additional Features
14827 \begin_layout Standard
14828 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14829 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14830 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14831 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14832 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14833 This happens in two stages:
14836 \begin_layout Enumerate
14837 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14838 generating a file with the extension,
14839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14853 \begin_layout Enumerate
14854 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14858 file to produce printable output.
14861 \begin_layout Subsection
14862 Output file formats
14863 \begin_inset Index idx
14866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14875 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14883 Simple text (ASCII)
14884 \begin_inset Index idx
14887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14888 File formats ! ASCII
14896 \begin_layout Standard
14897 This file type has the extension
14898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14914 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14921 \begin_layout Standard
14922 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14924 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14925 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14927 \begin_inset space ~
14933 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14934 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14935 \begin_inset space ~
14939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14941 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14946 If your document includes such material, use
14948 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14949 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14951 \begin_inset space ~
14955 \begin_inset space ~
14959 \begin_inset space ~
14967 \begin_inset space ~
14971 \begin_inset space ~
14977 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14978 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14983 \begin_inset Index idx
14986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14987 File formats ! LaTeX
14995 \begin_layout Standard
14996 This file type has the extension
14997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15008 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
15010 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
15011 it manually with console commands.
15012 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
15013 you view or export your document.
15016 \begin_layout Standard
15017 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
15019 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15020 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15035 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
15036 \begin_inset space ~
15040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15042 reference "sub:Export"
15049 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15051 \begin_inset Index idx
15054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15063 \begin_layout Standard
15064 This file type has the extension
15065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15085 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15086 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15087 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15091 \begin_layout Standard
15092 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15093 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15094 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15095 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15096 when you view the DVI.
15097 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15100 \begin_layout Standard
15101 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15103 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15104 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15109 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15110 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15112 \begin_inset space ~
15119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15129 The latter option uses the program
15138 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15139 font access (see section
15140 \begin_inset space ~
15144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15146 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15151 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15152 standard TeX processor.
15155 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15157 \begin_inset Index idx
15160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15161 File formats ! PostScript
15169 \begin_layout Standard
15170 This file type has the extension
15171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15183 PostScript was developed by the company
15187 as a printer language.
15188 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15190 PostScript can be seen as a
15191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15194 programming language
15195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15198 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15203 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15209 \begin_inset Index idx
15212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15213 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15223 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15226 \begin_layout Standard
15227 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15231 Encapsulated PostScript
15232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15235 (EPS, file extension
15236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15248 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15249 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15250 If, for example, you have 50
15251 \begin_inset space ~
15254 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15255 \begin_inset space ~
15258 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15259 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15260 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15261 EPS to avoid this problem.
15264 \begin_layout Standard
15265 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15267 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15268 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15274 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15276 \begin_inset Index idx
15279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15286 \begin_inset Index idx
15289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15298 \begin_layout Standard
15299 This file type has the extension
15300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15316 Portable Document Format
15317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15324 was derived from PostScript.
15325 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15334 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15335 looks exactly the same.
15338 \begin_layout Standard
15339 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15343 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15347 (JPG, file extension
15348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15375 Portable Network Graphics
15376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15379 (PNG, file extension
15380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15392 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15393 background to one of these formats.
15394 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15395 will slow down your workflow.
15396 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15399 \begin_layout Standard
15400 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15402 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15408 \begin_layout Description
15410 \begin_inset space ~
15413 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15417 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15420 \begin_layout Description
15422 \begin_inset space ~
15429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15436 X) This uses the program
15440 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15445 is a new engine, derived from
15449 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15450 access (see section
15451 \begin_inset space ~
15455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15457 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15462 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15463 standard TeX processor.
15466 \begin_layout Description
15468 \begin_inset space ~
15475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15482 X) This uses the program
15486 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15491 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15492 font access (see section
15493 \begin_inset space ~
15497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15499 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15504 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15505 vertically written Japanese.
15508 \begin_layout Description
15510 \begin_inset space ~
15513 (cropped) This is the same as
15516 \begin_inset space ~
15521 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15522 This is for example useful if you want to use LyX to generate good-looking
15523 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15526 \begin_layout Description
15528 \begin_inset space ~
15531 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15535 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15539 \begin_layout Description
15541 \begin_inset space ~
15544 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15548 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15549 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15553 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15554 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15557 \begin_layout Standard
15561 \begin_inset space ~
15570 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15571 works without problems.
15572 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15573 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15577 \begin_inset space ~
15584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15596 \begin_inset space ~
15603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15612 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15620 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15622 \begin_inset Index idx
15625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15626 FileFormats ! XHTML
15632 \begin_inset Index idx
15635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15644 \begin_layout Standard
15645 This file type has the extension
15646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15658 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15659 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15660 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15661 suitable for the purpose.
15662 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15664 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15665 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15668 between different formats, which are described in section
15670 Math Output in XHTML
15675 \begin_inset space ~
15683 \begin_layout Standard
15684 XHTML output remains
15685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15692 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15695 LyX and the World Wide Web
15699 Additional Features
15701 manual, for more information.
15704 \begin_layout Standard
15705 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15707 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15708 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15714 \begin_layout Subsection
15716 \begin_inset Index idx
15719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15728 \begin_layout Standard
15729 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15730 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15739 or use the toolbar button
15746 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15747 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15754 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15758 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15766 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15771 Further output formats can be selected via
15773 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15774 View (Other Formats)
15776 or the toolbar button
15777 \begin_inset Graphics
15778 filename ../images/view-others.png
15780 groupId toolbarbuttons
15787 \begin_layout Standard
15788 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15789 viewer window using the menu
15791 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15796 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15797 Update (Other Formats)
15802 \begin_layout Standard
15803 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15805 To have a real output, export your document.
15808 \begin_layout Subsection
15809 Printing the File from within LyX
15810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15812 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15819 \begin_layout Standard
15820 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15821 it directly from within LyX.
15822 To print a file, select the menu
15824 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15830 arg "dialog-show print"
15833 ) or click on the toolbar button
15836 arg "dialog-show print"
15840 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15841 This file is then processed by the program
15845 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15850 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15853 \begin_layout Standard
15854 You can set the following print parameters in the
15857 \begin_inset space ~
15865 \begin_layout Labeling
15866 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15871 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15876 Note that this printer name is for the program
15885 has to be configured for this printer name.
15886 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15887 \begin_inset space ~
15891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15893 reference "sub:Printer"
15902 The printer should understand PostScript.
15905 \begin_layout Labeling
15906 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15911 The name of a file to print to.
15912 The output will be a PostScript file.
15913 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15917 \begin_layout Standard
15918 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15919 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15920 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15921 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15922 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15923 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15924 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15927 \begin_layout Section
15928 A few Words about Typography
15929 \begin_inset Index idx
15932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15941 \begin_layout Subsection
15942 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15943 \begin_inset Index idx
15946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15953 \begin_inset Index idx
15956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15965 \begin_layout Standard
15967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15978 character comes in four lengths: the
15990 , and the minus sign:
15991 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15997 \begin_layout Standard
15998 \begin_inset Tabular
15999 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16000 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16001 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16002 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16003 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16004 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16033 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16073 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16098 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16100 \begin_inset space ~
16103 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16110 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16135 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16137 \begin_inset space ~
16140 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16161 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16195 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16201 \begin_layout Standard
16202 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16214 character multiple times in a row.
16215 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16216 the final output, but not in LyX.
16218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16248 \begin_layout Standard
16249 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16250 math mode and has a length of its own.
16251 Here are some examples:
16254 \begin_layout Enumerate
16255 line- and page-breaks
16256 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16266 \begin_layout Enumerate
16268 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16278 \begin_layout Enumerate
16279 Oh — there's a dash.
16280 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16290 \begin_layout Enumerate
16291 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16295 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16305 \begin_layout Subsection
16307 \begin_inset Index idx
16310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16319 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16326 \begin_layout Standard
16327 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16328 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16333 \begin_inset Index idx
16336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16337 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16342 following the rules of the document language.
16345 \begin_layout Standard
16346 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16351 font and with unusual constructs, like
16352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16360 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16362 This is done with the menu
16364 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16365 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16367 \begin_inset space ~
16373 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16374 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16377 \begin_layout Standard
16378 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16379 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16389 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16397 as a hyphenation possibility.
16398 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16399 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16400 as described in section
16401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16404 Prevent Hyphenation
16405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16411 \begin_inset space ~
16419 \begin_layout Subsection
16421 \begin_inset Index idx
16424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16433 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16434 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16437 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16444 \begin_layout Standard
16445 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16446 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16447 LaTeX then adds the
16448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16451 appropriate amount of space.
16452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16457 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16458 gets after another word.
16461 \begin_layout Standard
16462 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16463 not work in all cases.
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16476 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16477 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16480 \begin_layout Standard
16481 Here are some examples of
16485 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16488 \begin_layout Itemize
16493 \begin_layout Itemize
16498 \begin_layout Standard
16499 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16502 \begin_layout Itemize
16504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16508 this is too much space!
16511 \begin_layout Itemize
16516 \begin_layout Standard
16517 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16520 \begin_layout Standard
16521 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16524 \begin_layout Enumerate
16528 \begin_inset space ~
16533 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16534 \begin_inset space ~
16538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16540 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16545 \begin_inset Index idx
16548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16549 Spaces ! inter-word
16557 \begin_layout Enumerate
16561 \begin_inset space ~
16566 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16567 \begin_inset space ~
16571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16573 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16578 \begin_inset Index idx
16581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16590 \begin_layout Enumerate
16594 \begin_inset space ~
16598 \begin_inset space ~
16602 \begin_inset space ~
16609 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16611 \begin_inset space ~
16616 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16617 This function is also bound to
16620 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16626 \begin_layout Standard
16627 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16630 \begin_layout Itemize
16632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16636 \begin_inset space \space{}
16639 this is too much space!
16642 \begin_layout Itemize
16643 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16647 \begin_layout Standard
16648 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16649 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16650 will take care of this.
16653 \begin_layout Standard
16654 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16658 \begin_inset space ~
16663 feature described in the section
16669 Additional Features
16674 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16676 \begin_inset Index idx
16679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16680 Typography ! Quotes
16686 \begin_inset Index idx
16689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16720 \begin_layout Standard
16721 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16722 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16723 and use a closing quote at the end.
16725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16733 The keyboard character,
16737 , generates this automatically.
16740 \begin_layout Standard
16741 You can specify what character the
16745 key produces using the submenu
16751 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16755 \begin_inset Index idx
16758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16759 Document ! Settings
16769 There are six choices:
16772 \begin_layout Labeling
16773 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16796 \begin_layout Labeling
16797 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16800 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16804 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16810 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16814 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16820 \begin_layout Labeling
16821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16824 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16828 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16834 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16838 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16844 \begin_layout Labeling
16845 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16848 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16852 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16858 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16862 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16868 \begin_layout Labeling
16869 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16872 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16876 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16882 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16886 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16892 \begin_layout Labeling
16893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16896 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16900 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16906 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16910 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16916 \begin_layout Standard
16917 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16920 arg "quote-insert single"
16926 \begin_layout Subsection
16928 \begin_inset Index idx
16931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16932 Typography ! Ligatures
16938 \begin_inset Index idx
16941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16972 name "sub:Ligatures"
16979 \begin_layout Standard
16980 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16981 print them as single characters.
16982 These groups are known as
16987 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16989 Here are the standard ligatures:
16992 \begin_layout Itemize
16996 \begin_layout Itemize
17000 \begin_layout Itemize
17004 \begin_layout Itemize
17008 \begin_layout Itemize
17012 \begin_layout Standard
17013 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17016 \begin_layout Standard
17017 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17018 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17026 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17042 To break a ligature, use
17044 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17045 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17047 \begin_inset space ~
17054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17065 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17082 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17090 \begin_layout Subsection
17092 \begin_inset Index idx
17095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17104 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17111 \begin_layout Standard
17112 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
17113 characters in different sizes and positions.
17114 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
17115 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
17116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17135 \begin_inset Note Note
17138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17139 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17140 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17145 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17146 following proper names:
17149 \begin_layout Description
17150 LyX The name of the game, write
17151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17172 \begin_layout Description
17173 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17195 \begin_layout Description
17196 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17218 \begin_layout Description
17219 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17241 \begin_layout Standard
17242 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17247 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17255 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17256 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17257 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17260 : The actual version is
17261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17268 , the previous one was
17269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17279 \begin_layout Standard
17280 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17281 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17282 In LyX this will look like
17283 \begin_inset Graphics
17284 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17290 \begin_inset Newline newline
17293 For more about TeX Code, see section
17294 \begin_inset space ~
17298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17300 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17307 \begin_layout Subsection
17309 \begin_inset Index idx
17312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17321 \begin_layout Standard
17322 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17323 space between two words.
17324 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17334 for units use the menu
17336 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17337 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17339 \begin_inset space ~
17347 arg "space-insert thin"
17353 \begin_layout Standard
17354 Here is an example to show the differences:
17357 \begin_layout Standard
17358 \begin_inset Tabular
17359 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17360 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17361 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17362 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17369 \begin_inset space ~
17373 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17385 space between number and unit
17392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17401 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17413 half space between number and unit
17426 \begin_layout Subsection
17428 \begin_inset Index idx
17431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17432 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17440 \begin_layout Standard
17441 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17443 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17444 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17445 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17446 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17447 These bits of text became known as
17458 \begin_layout Standard
17459 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17460 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17461 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17462 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17463 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17464 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17465 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17466 \begin_inset Newline newline
17474 \begin_inset Newline newline
17482 \begin_inset Newline newline
17485 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17486 Some LaTeX books (such as
17487 \begin_inset space ~
17491 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17493 key "latexcompanion"
17498 \begin_inset space ~
17502 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17508 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17512 \begin_layout Chapter
17513 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17516 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17523 \begin_layout Standard
17524 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17527 \begin_inset space ~
17533 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17536 \begin_layout Section
17538 \begin_inset Index idx
17541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17557 \begin_layout Standard
17558 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17561 \begin_layout Description
17563 \begin_inset space ~
17566 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17567 \begin_inset Newline newline
17571 \begin_inset Note Note
17574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17575 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17583 \begin_layout Description
17584 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17585 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17587 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17588 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17601 \begin_inset space ~
17607 \begin_inset Newline newline
17611 \begin_inset Note Comment
17614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17615 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17623 \begin_layout Description
17625 \begin_inset space ~
17628 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17629 set in the document settings under
17631 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17633 \begin_inset space ~
17639 \begin_inset Newline newline
17643 \begin_inset Newline newline
17647 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17656 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17657 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17662 of a comment that appears in the output.
17668 \begin_inset Newline newline
17672 \begin_inset Newline newline
17675 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17678 \begin_layout Standard
17679 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17687 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17691 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17694 \begin_layout Section
17696 \begin_inset Index idx
17699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17708 name "sec:Footnotes"
17715 \begin_layout Standard
17716 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17719 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17722 or the toolbar button
17725 arg "footnote-insert"
17737 \begin_inset Graphics
17738 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17747 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17776 label, the box will
17780 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17781 Clicking on the box label again will close
17794 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17795 and click on the footnote
17810 \begin_layout Standard
17811 Here is an example footnote:
17819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17820 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17828 \begin_layout Standard
17829 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17830 position where the footnote box is placed.
17831 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17832 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17833 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17834 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17839 ey are described in the
17842 \begin_inset space ~
17850 \begin_layout Section
17852 \begin_inset Index idx
17855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17864 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17871 \begin_layout Standard
17872 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17873 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17875 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17877 \begin_inset space ~
17882 or the toolbar button
17885 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17911 appearing within your text.
17912 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17921 \begin_layout Standard
17922 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17926 \begin_inset Marginal
17929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17931 This is a marginal note.
17939 \begin_layout Standard
17940 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17941 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17942 pages, right on odd pages.
17945 \begin_layout Standard
17946 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17949 \begin_inset space ~
17957 \begin_inset space ~
17965 \begin_layout Section
17966 Graphics and Images
17967 \begin_inset Index idx
17970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17977 \begin_inset Index idx
17980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17989 name "sec:Graphics"
17996 \begin_layout Standard
17997 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17998 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18001 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18006 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18010 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18013 \begin_layout Standard
18014 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18019 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18020 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18022 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18023 \begin_inset space ~
18027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18029 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18036 \begin_layout Standard
18041 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18042 of the image in the output.
18043 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18047 \begin_inset space ~
18051 \begin_inset space ~
18060 \begin_inset space ~
18064 \begin_inset space ~
18068 \begin_inset space ~
18073 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18074 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18082 \begin_layout Standard
18089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18097 \begin_inset space ~
18101 \begin_inset space ~
18108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18117 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
18118 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
18122 \begin_inset space ~
18127 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18128 with the image size is printed.
18132 \begin_inset space ~
18136 \begin_inset space ~
18140 \begin_inset space ~
18145 is explained in the
18148 \begin_inset space ~
18160 \begin_layout Standard
18161 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18162 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18164 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18167 \begin_layout Standard
18169 \begin_inset Graphics
18170 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18178 \begin_layout Standard
18179 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18180 the image into a float, see section
18181 \begin_inset space ~
18185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18187 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18194 \begin_layout Subsection
18196 \begin_inset Index idx
18199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18208 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18215 \begin_layout Standard
18216 You can insert images in any known file format.
18217 But as we explained in section
18218 \begin_inset space ~
18222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18224 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18228 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18229 LyX therefore uses the program
18233 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18234 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18235 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18236 \begin_inset space ~
18240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18242 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18249 \begin_layout Standard
18250 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18253 \begin_layout Description
18255 \begin_inset space ~
18258 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18259 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18260 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18264 Graphics Interchange Format
18265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18268 (GIF, file extension
18269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18281 \begin_inset Index idx
18284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18316 Portable Network Graphics
18317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18320 (PNG, file extension
18321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18333 \begin_inset Index idx
18336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18368 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18372 (JPG, file extension
18373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18397 \begin_inset Index idx
18400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18431 \begin_layout Description
18433 \begin_inset space ~
18436 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18438 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18439 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18440 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18441 \begin_inset Newline newline
18444 Scalable image formats can be
18445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18448 Scalable Vector Graphics
18449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18452 (SVG, file extension
18453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18465 \begin_inset Index idx
18468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18500 Encapsulated PostScript
18501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18504 (EPS, file extension
18505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18517 \begin_inset Index idx
18520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18552 Portable Document Format
18553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18556 (PDF, file extension
18557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18569 \begin_inset Index idx
18572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18587 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18588 result will not be scalable.
18589 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18595 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18603 \begin_layout Standard
18604 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18611 \begin_layout Subsection
18612 Grouping of Image Settings
18613 \begin_inset Index idx
18616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18617 Images ! Settings grouping
18625 \begin_layout Standard
18626 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18628 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18629 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18631 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18632 need to manually change each of them.
18636 \begin_layout Standard
18637 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18640 \begin_inset space ~
18644 \begin_inset space ~
18659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18667 \begin_inset space ~
18671 \begin_inset space ~
18678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18688 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18689 and checking the name of the desired group.
18692 \begin_layout Section
18694 \begin_inset Index idx
18697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18713 \begin_layout Standard
18714 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18717 arg "tabular-insert"
18722 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18726 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18727 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18728 from the rest of the table.
18729 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18730 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18732 Here is an example table:
18735 \begin_layout Standard
18737 \begin_inset Tabular
18738 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18739 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18740 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18741 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18742 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18743 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18943 \begin_layout Subsection
18947 \begin_layout Standard
18948 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18951 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18955 This brings up the table dialog.
18956 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18957 cursor is placed currently.
18958 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18959 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18960 done on all of your selection.
18963 \begin_layout Standard
18964 In addition to the table dialog, the
18967 \begin_inset space ~
18972 helps you in setting table properties.
18973 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18976 \begin_layout Standard
18980 \begin_inset space ~
18985 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18986 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18987 current cell respectively.
18988 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18990 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18991 of text, see section
18992 \begin_inset space ~
18996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18998 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
19005 \begin_layout Standard
19006 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19007 using the check box
19016 This will merge the cells to
19020 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19021 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19022 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19023 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19024 in the last row without the upper border:
19027 \begin_layout Standard
19029 \begin_inset Tabular
19030 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19031 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19032 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19033 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19034 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19035 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19046 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19055 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19131 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19166 \begin_layout Standard
19167 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19168 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19169 explained in the chapter
19176 \begin_inset space ~
19182 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
19183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19186 degrees counterclockwise.
19187 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19190 \begin_layout Standard
19191 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19199 Most DVI-viewers are
19203 able to display rotations.
19211 \begin_layout Standard
19216 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19221 adds lines for all cell borders.
19224 \begin_layout Subsection
19226 \begin_inset Index idx
19229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19230 Tables ! Longtables
19236 \begin_inset Index idx
19239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19248 \begin_layout Standard
19249 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19252 \begin_inset space ~
19256 \begin_inset space ~
19265 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19266 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19269 \begin_layout Description
19274 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19275 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19276 except for the first page, if
19279 \begin_inset space ~
19287 \begin_layout Description
19291 \begin_inset space ~
19296 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19297 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19300 \begin_layout Description
19305 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19306 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19307 except for the last page, if
19310 \begin_inset space ~
19318 \begin_layout Description
19322 \begin_inset space ~
19327 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19328 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19331 \begin_layout Description
19332 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19333 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19335 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19339 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19342 \begin_inset space ~
19350 \begin_layout Standard
19351 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19352 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19353 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19359 In this context, first means first in this order:
19362 \begin_inset space ~
19374 \begin_inset space ~
19379 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19382 \begin_layout Standard
19384 \begin_inset Tabular
19385 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19386 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19387 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19388 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19389 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19390 <row endfirsthead="true">
19391 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19397 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19402 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19411 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19421 <row endfirsthead="true">
19422 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19433 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19442 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19454 <row endhead="true">
19455 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19466 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19475 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19485 <row endhead="true">
19486 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19497 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19506 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19518 <row endfoot="true">
19519 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19530 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19539 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19570 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20520 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20529 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20726 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20757 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20881 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21005 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21036 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21098 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21253 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21284 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21377 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21408 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21439 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21470 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21500 <row endlastfoot="true">
21501 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21512 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 \begin_layout Subsection
21540 \begin_inset Index idx
21543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21552 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21559 \begin_layout Standard
21560 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21561 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21562 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21563 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21567 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21570 \begin_layout Standard
21571 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21572 for the column in the table dialog.
21573 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21574 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21578 \begin_layout Standard
21580 \begin_inset Tabular
21581 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21582 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21583 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21584 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21585 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21605 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21674 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21730 This is longer now.
21735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21786 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21787 This is longer now.
21792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 \begin_layout Standard
21819 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21820 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21825 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21826 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21832 Selection with the mouse or with
21836 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21837 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21838 the selection from outside the table.
21841 \begin_layout Section
21843 \begin_inset Index idx
21846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21862 \begin_layout Subsection
21866 \begin_layout Standard
21867 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21868 have a fixed location.
21870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21877 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21885 \begin_inset space ~
21890 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21891 too many notes on the current page.
21894 \begin_layout Standard
21895 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21896 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21897 and pages without text.
21898 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21899 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21900 Floats are therefore numbered.
21901 Referencing is described in section
21902 \begin_inset space ~
21906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21908 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21915 \begin_layout Standard
21916 To insert a float, use the menu
21918 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21922 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21923 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21925 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21926 \begin_inset Index idx
21929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21935 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21936 paragraph within the float.
21937 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21938 by left-clicking on the box label.
21939 A closed float box looks like this:
21940 \begin_inset Graphics
21941 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21946 – a gray button with a red label.
21949 \begin_layout Standard
21950 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21951 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21954 \begin_layout Subsection
21956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21958 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21963 \begin_inset Index idx
21966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21967 Floats ! Figure floats
21975 \begin_layout Standard
21977 \begin_inset space ~
21981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21983 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21987 was created using the menu
21989 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21990 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21996 arg "float-insert figure"
22000 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22003 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22009 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22013 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22014 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22016 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22018 \begin_inset space ~
22026 arg "layout-paragraph"
22032 \begin_layout Standard
22033 \begin_inset Float figure
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22040 \begin_inset Graphics
22041 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22051 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22056 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22060 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22073 \begin_layout Standard
22074 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22075 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22077 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22086 ) and refer to it using the menu
22088 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22094 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22098 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22099 vague references like
22100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22107 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
22109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22117 For more about cross-references, see section
22118 \begin_inset space ~
22122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22124 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22131 \begin_layout Standard
22132 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22133 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22134 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22135 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22136 as described in section
22137 \begin_inset space ~
22141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22143 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22149 \begin_inset space ~
22153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22155 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22159 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22160 You can also set the images one below the other.
22162 \begin_inset space ~
22166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22168 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22175 reference "fig:Platypus"
22179 are the subfigures.
22182 \begin_layout Standard
22183 \begin_inset Float figure
22188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22193 \begin_inset Float figure
22198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22199 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22204 name "fig:Undefinable"
22216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22217 \begin_inset Graphics
22218 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22229 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22233 \begin_inset Float figure
22238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22239 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22244 name "fig:Platypus"
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22257 \begin_inset Graphics
22258 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22270 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22277 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22282 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22286 Two distorted images.
22299 \begin_layout Subsection
22301 \begin_inset Index idx
22304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22305 Floats ! Table floats
22313 \begin_layout Standard
22314 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22316 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22317 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22320 or the toolbar button
22323 arg "float-insert table"
22327 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22328 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22329 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22331 \begin_inset space ~
22335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22337 reference "tab:Table-float"
22344 \begin_layout Standard
22345 \begin_inset Float table
22350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22356 name "tab:Table-float"
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22370 \begin_inset Tabular
22371 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22372 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22373 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22374 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22375 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22502 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22526 \end{array}\right]$
22534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22547 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22568 \begin_layout Subsection
22570 \begin_inset Index idx
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 \begin_layout Standard
22583 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22584 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22585 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22587 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22595 \begin_inset space ~
22603 \begin_layout Section
22605 \begin_inset Index idx
22608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 \begin_layout Standard
22618 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22620 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22621 \begin_inset space \space{}
22628 \begin_layout Standard
22629 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22631 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22635 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22636 and its alignment within the page.
22639 \begin_layout Standard
22641 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22651 height_special "totalheight"
22654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22657 This is a minipage.
22658 The text is set in an italic style.
22661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22664 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22665 another formatting.
22673 \begin_layout Standard
22674 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22677 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22681 as described in section
22682 \begin_inset space ~
22686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22688 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22693 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22699 \begin_layout Standard
22700 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22710 height_special "totalheight"
22713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22714 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22715 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22721 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22725 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22735 height_special "totalheight"
22738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22740 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22748 \begin_layout Standard
22749 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22755 \begin_layout Standard
22756 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22758 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22765 \begin_inset space ~
22773 \begin_layout Chapter
22774 Mathematical Formulas
22775 \begin_inset Index idx
22778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 \begin_inset Index idx
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22819 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22826 \begin_layout Standard
22827 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22832 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22835 \begin_layout Section
22837 \begin_inset Index idx
22840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22849 \begin_layout Standard
22850 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22863 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22865 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22866 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22867 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22869 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22875 \begin_layout Standard
22876 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22880 \begin_inset space ~
22885 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22888 \begin_layout Standard
22889 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22890 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22893 \begin_layout Standard
22894 This is a line with an inline formula
22895 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22901 \begin_layout Standard
22902 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22903 paragraph, like this one:
22904 \begin_inset Formula
22911 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22914 \begin_layout Standard
22915 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22916 For example, typing
22917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22930 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22931 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22935 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22938 \begin_inset space ~
22946 \begin_layout Subsection
22947 Navigating in Formulas
22948 \begin_inset Index idx
22951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22960 \begin_layout Standard
22961 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22962 achieved with the arrow keys.
22963 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22964 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22969 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22970 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22974 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22978 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22981 \end{array}\right]$
22989 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22994 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22995 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22998 \begin_layout Standard
23003 , printed in this document as
23004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23008 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23015 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23016 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23017 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23022 For example, if you want
23023 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23031 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23041 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23045 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23050 , since in the latter case only the
23053 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23058 will be under the square root sign:
23059 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23065 \begin_layout Standard
23066 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23068 \begin_inset Formula
23070 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23079 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23080 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23083 \begin_layout Subsection
23087 \begin_layout Standard
23088 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23089 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23093 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23094 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23095 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23096 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23097 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
23100 \begin_layout Subsection
23101 Exponents and Subscripts
23102 \begin_inset Index idx
23105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23112 \begin_inset Index idx
23115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23124 \begin_layout Standard
23125 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23128 arg "math-superscript"
23134 arg "math-subscript"
23137 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23139 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23142 , type in a formula
23145 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23155 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23161 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23165 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23171 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23177 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23186 , you have to use an extra
23190 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23191 For example, if you want
23192 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23198 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23204 Subscripts are similar: To get
23205 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23211 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23219 \begin_layout Subsection
23221 \begin_inset Index idx
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23233 \begin_layout Standard
23234 Create a fraction either with the command
23240 or by using the icon
23243 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23249 \begin_inset space ~
23255 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23256 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23257 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23262 To move back up, press
23267 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23268 \begin_inset Formula
23270 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23273 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23281 \begin_layout Subsection
23283 \begin_inset Index idx
23286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23295 \begin_layout Standard
23296 Roots can be created using the
23299 \begin_inset space ~
23307 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23313 arg "math-insert \\root"
23335 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23341 always produces a square root.
23344 \begin_layout Subsection
23345 Operators with Limits
23346 \begin_inset Index idx
23349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 \begin_inset Index idx
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23368 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23375 \begin_layout Standard
23377 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23381 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23384 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23385 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23386 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23387 The sum operator will automatically place its
23388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23395 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23397 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23401 \begin_inset Formula
23403 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23408 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23412 \begin_layout Standard
23413 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23415 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23416 behind the operator and using the menu
23418 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23419 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23421 \begin_inset space ~
23425 \begin_inset space ~
23439 \begin_layout Standard
23440 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23449 \begin_inset Index idx
23452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 \begin_inset Formula
23461 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23466 which will place the
23467 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23479 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23480 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23486 \begin_layout Standard
23487 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23494 Have a look at section
23495 \begin_inset space ~
23499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23501 reference "sub:Functions"
23505 for an explanation of function macros.
23508 \begin_layout Subsection
23510 \begin_inset Index idx
23513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 \begin_layout Standard
23523 Most math symbols can be found in the
23526 \begin_inset space ~
23531 under one of several categories; including
23548 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23552 \begin_layout Standard
23553 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23554 you don't have to use the
23557 \begin_inset space ~
23562 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23563 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23566 \begin_layout Subsection
23568 \begin_inset Index idx
23571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23580 \begin_layout Standard
23581 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23586 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23592 \begin_inset space ~
23600 arg "math-insert \\space"
23604 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23605 For example, the sequence
23610 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23614 \begin_inset Graphics
23615 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23620 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23621 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23622 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23623 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23625 Here are two examples:
23628 \begin_layout Standard
23638 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23644 \begin_layout Standard
23654 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23660 \begin_layout Subsection
23662 \begin_inset Index idx
23665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23674 name "sub:Functions"
23681 \begin_layout Standard
23685 \begin_inset space ~
23690 contains under the button
23693 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23696 a number of function macros, such as
23697 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23701 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23709 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23716 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23717 avoid confusions, because
23718 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23722 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23728 \begin_layout Standard
23729 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23731 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23735 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23741 \begin_layout Standard
23742 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23743 are placed, as described in section
23744 \begin_inset space ~
23748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23750 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23757 \begin_layout Subsection
23759 \begin_inset Index idx
23762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23771 \begin_layout Standard
23772 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23774 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23775 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23776 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23779 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23780 Our example is entered by typing
23785 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23792 \begin_inset space ~
23796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23798 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23802 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23805 \begin_layout Standard
23806 \begin_inset Float table
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23812 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23817 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23821 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23831 \begin_inset Tabular
23832 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23833 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23834 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23835 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23836 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23920 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24028 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24136 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24190 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24298 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24352 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24397 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24418 \begin_layout Standard
24419 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24422 \begin_inset space ~
24430 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24433 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24437 \begin_layout Section
24438 Brackets and Delimiters
24439 \begin_inset Index idx
24442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24449 \begin_inset Index idx
24452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24461 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24468 \begin_layout Standard
24469 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24470 For some purposes, using just the keys
24475 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24476 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24477 toolbar delimiter icon
24480 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24484 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24485 \begin_inset Formula
24487 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24495 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24496 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24500 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24503 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24509 \begin_inset Formula
24511 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24519 \begin_layout Standard
24520 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24521 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24525 \begin_layout Standard
24526 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24527 left side and right side.
24528 If you use the option
24531 \begin_inset space ~
24536 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24537 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24538 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24543 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24546 \begin_layout Standard
24547 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24548 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24549 is to go inside the brackets.
24550 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24555 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24556 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24557 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24561 arg "math-delim ( )"
24567 \begin_layout Section
24568 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24569 \begin_inset Index idx
24572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24579 \begin_inset Index idx
24582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24589 \begin_inset Index idx
24592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24593 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24601 \begin_layout Standard
24602 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24605 \begin_inset space ~
24613 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24617 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24618 Here is an example:
24619 \begin_inset Formula
24621 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24630 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24631 \begin_inset space ~
24635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24637 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24642 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24643 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24644 This alignment is set in the box
24649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24697 for every column as default.
24698 For example, the sequence
24699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24710 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24711 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24712 corresponds to the relevant column.
24713 The result will look like this:
24714 \begin_inset Formula
24717 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24718 column & has & has\, right\\
24719 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24728 \begin_layout Standard
24729 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24732 arg "newline-insert newline"
24735 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24736 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24738 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24741 or the math toolbar.
24744 \begin_layout Standard
24745 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24746 It can be created with the menu
24748 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24749 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24751 \begin_inset space ~
24763 Here is an example:
24764 \begin_inset Formula
24778 \begin_layout Standard
24779 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24782 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24785 arg "newline-insert newline"
24789 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24794 arg "newline-insert newline"
24797 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24805 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24806 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24807 A new row is created by every further entry of
24810 arg "newline-insert newline"
24814 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24815 Here is an example:
24816 \begin_inset Formula
24818 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24819 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24824 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24825 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24826 \begin_inset Formula
24828 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24836 \begin_layout Standard
24837 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24844 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24845 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24848 reference "eq:asquared"
24853 The other types are described in section
24854 \begin_inset space ~
24858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24860 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24867 \begin_layout Section
24868 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24869 \begin_inset Index idx
24872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24873 Math ! Formula numbering
24879 \begin_inset Index idx
24882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24883 Math ! Referencing formulas
24889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24891 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24898 \begin_layout Standard
24899 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24901 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24902 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24904 \begin_inset space ~
24908 \begin_inset space ~
24916 arg "math-number-toggle"
24920 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24921 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24922 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24923 the document class.
24924 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24925 separated by a dot:
24926 \begin_inset Formula
24936 arg "math-number-toggle"
24939 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24940 You can only number displayed formulas.
24943 \begin_layout Standard
24944 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24946 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24947 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24949 \begin_inset space ~
24953 \begin_inset space ~
24961 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24964 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24965 \begin_inset Formula
24968 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24974 To number all lines use the shortcut
24977 arg "math-number-toggle"
24983 \begin_layout Standard
24984 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24987 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24988 A label is inserted with the menu
24990 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24999 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25000 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25001 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25013 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25014 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25015 We inserted in the following example the label
25016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25023 in the second line:
25024 \begin_inset Formula
25026 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25027 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25032 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25033 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25034 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25036 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25038 \begin_inset space ~
25046 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25050 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25051 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25052 as the formula number:
25055 \begin_layout Standard
25056 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25059 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25066 \begin_layout Standard
25067 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
25068 \begin_inset space ~
25072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25074 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25079 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25087 \begin_layout Section
25088 User defined math macros
25089 \begin_inset Index idx
25092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25101 \begin_layout Standard
25102 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25103 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25104 Math macros are explained in section
25107 \begin_inset space ~
25119 \begin_layout Section
25123 \begin_layout Subsection
25125 \begin_inset Index idx
25128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25137 \begin_layout Standard
25138 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25139 To set a font in a formula, use the
25142 \begin_inset space ~
25150 arg "math-insert \\font"
25153 , or enter its command, listed in table
25154 \begin_inset space ~
25158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25160 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25167 \begin_layout Standard
25168 \begin_inset Float table
25173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25174 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25179 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25183 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25193 \begin_inset Tabular
25194 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25195 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25196 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25197 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25229 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25256 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25283 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25316 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25343 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25370 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25404 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25431 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25465 \begin_layout Standard
25466 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25474 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25490 \begin_layout Standard
25491 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25492 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25497 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25498 space when you need a space in the box.
25499 Here is an example where
25500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25511 denotes the set of numbers:
25512 \begin_inset Formula
25514 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25522 \begin_layout Standard
25523 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25524 You can, for example, put a character in
25533 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25537 \begin_inset Newline newline
25540 So it is better not to use this feature.
25543 \begin_layout Standard
25544 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25545 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25549 \begin_inset Newline newline
25552 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25558 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25559 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25565 \begin_layout Standard
25572 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25575 \begin_layout Standard
25576 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25578 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25579 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25581 \begin_inset space ~
25589 \begin_layout Subsection
25591 \begin_inset Index idx
25594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25603 \begin_layout Standard
25604 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25606 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25610 \begin_inset space ~
25614 \begin_inset space ~
25622 \begin_inset space ~
25630 arg "math-insert \\font"
25634 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25635 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25636 Here is an example:
25637 \begin_inset Formula
25640 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25641 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25650 \begin_layout Subsection
25652 \begin_inset Index idx
25655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25664 \begin_layout Standard
25665 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25666 automatically chosen in most situations.
25684 For most characters,
25692 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25693 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25698 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25699 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25701 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25704 arg "math-insert \\style"
25708 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25709 For example, you can set
25710 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25713 , which is normally in
25722 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25726 The four styles are used in the following example:
25729 \begin_layout Standard
25730 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25734 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25738 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25742 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25748 \begin_layout Standard
25749 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25750 is set in a particular size with the menu
25752 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25754 \begin_inset space ~
25759 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25760 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25761 will be adjusted to correspond.
25762 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25773 \begin_layout Standard
25777 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25783 \begin_layout Section
25785 \begin_inset Index idx
25788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25795 \begin_inset Index idx
25798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25807 \begin_layout Standard
25808 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25809 (AMS) that are in common use.
25812 \begin_layout Subsection
25813 Enabling AMS-Support
25816 \begin_layout Standard
25817 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25818 the document by selecting the checkbox
25821 \begin_inset space ~
25825 \begin_inset space ~
25829 \begin_inset space ~
25836 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25840 \begin_inset Index idx
25843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25844 Document ! Settings
25852 \begin_inset space ~
25858 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25859 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25862 \begin_layout Subsection
25864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25866 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25871 \begin_inset Index idx
25874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25875 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25883 \begin_layout Standard
25884 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25885 LyX allows you to choose between
25906 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25907 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25913 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25916 \begin_layout Chapter
25920 \begin_layout Section
25922 \begin_inset Index idx
25925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25934 name "sec:Cross-References"
25941 \begin_layout Standard
25942 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25943 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25945 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25946 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25947 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25950 \begin_layout Enumerate
25954 \begin_layout Enumerate
25955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25957 name "enu:Second-item"
25964 \begin_layout Enumerate
25968 \begin_layout Standard
25969 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25971 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25974 or by pressing the toolbar button
25981 A gray label box like this:
25982 \begin_inset Graphics
25983 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25988 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25989 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26024 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26025 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26041 \begin_layout Standard
26042 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26044 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26047 or the toolbar button
26050 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26054 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26055 \begin_inset Graphics
26056 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26061 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26063 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26076 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26080 \begin_layout Standard
26081 As an alternative to
26083 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26086 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26091 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26092 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26094 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26106 \begin_layout Standard
26107 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26108 \begin_inset space ~
26112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26114 reference "enu:Second-item"
26121 \begin_layout Standard
26122 It is recommended to use a protected space
26126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26127 described in section
26128 \begin_inset space ~
26132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26134 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26143 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26144 line breaks between them.
26147 \begin_layout Standard
26148 There are six formats of cross-references:
26151 \begin_layout Description
26152 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26155 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26162 \begin_layout Description
26163 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26164 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26176 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26183 \begin_layout Description
26184 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26185 \begin_inset space ~
26189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26190 LatexCommand pageref
26191 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26198 \begin_layout Description
26200 \begin_inset space ~
26204 \begin_inset space ~
26207 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26209 LatexCommand vpageref
26210 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26215 \begin_inset Newline newline
26218 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26219 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26220 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26221 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26222 it prints “on the next page”.
26223 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26226 \begin_layout Description
26228 \begin_inset space ~
26232 \begin_inset space ~
26236 \begin_inset space ~
26239 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26242 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26247 \begin_inset Newline newline
26250 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26256 ; otherwise it behaves like
26260 \begin_inset space ~
26264 \begin_inset space ~
26273 \begin_layout Description
26275 \begin_inset space ~
26278 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26279 \begin_inset Newline newline
26283 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26291 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26300 \begin_inset Index idx
26303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26304 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26310 \begin_inset Index idx
26313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26314 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26325 \begin_inset Newline newline
26328 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26331 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26335 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26336 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26344 is the default and preferred because
26348 supports only English documents.
26349 The format is specified by using the command
26361 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26362 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26375 ) can be done with this command
26376 \begin_inset Newline newline
26383 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26388 \begin_inset Newline newline
26391 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26393 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26395 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26402 \begin_layout Description
26404 \begin_inset space ~
26407 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26409 LatexCommand nameref
26410 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26417 \begin_layout Standard
26418 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26419 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26420 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26424 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26428 \begin_layout Standard
26429 You can only use the style
26433 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26437 is always possible.
26440 \begin_layout Standard
26441 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26442 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26444 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26445 \begin_inset space ~
26449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26451 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26458 \begin_layout Standard
26459 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26463 \begin_inset space ~
26467 \begin_inset space ~
26472 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26473 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26476 \begin_inset space ~
26481 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26482 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26485 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26491 \begin_layout Standard
26492 You can change labels at any time.
26493 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26494 do not need to think about this.
26497 \begin_layout Standard
26498 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26499 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26500 instead of the reference.
26503 \begin_layout Standard
26504 References are described in detail in the section
26505 \begin_inset space ~
26509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26519 \begin_inset space ~
26527 \begin_layout Section
26528 Table of Contents and other Listings
26529 \begin_inset Index idx
26532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26539 \begin_inset Index idx
26542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26558 \begin_layout Subsection
26560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26562 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26569 \begin_layout Standard
26570 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26572 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26573 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26575 \begin_inset space ~
26579 \begin_inset space ~
26585 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26586 If you click on it, the
26590 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26591 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26592 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26594 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26596 \begin_inset space ~
26601 that is described in section
26602 \begin_inset space ~
26606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26608 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26615 \begin_layout Standard
26616 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26617 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26619 \begin_inset space ~
26623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26625 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26629 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26631 \begin_inset space ~
26635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26637 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26641 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26643 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26646 \begin_layout Subsection
26647 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26650 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26657 \begin_layout Standard
26658 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26660 You can insert them via the
26662 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26666 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26669 \begin_layout Section
26670 URLs and Hyperlinks
26671 \begin_inset Index idx
26674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26681 \begin_inset Index idx
26684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26693 \begin_layout Subsection
26695 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26704 \begin_layout Standard
26705 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26707 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26713 \begin_layout Standard
26714 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26715 \begin_inset Flex URL
26718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26728 \begin_layout Standard
26729 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26735 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26739 \begin_layout Standard
26740 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26748 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26756 \begin_layout Subsection
26758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26760 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26767 \begin_layout Standard
26768 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26770 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26773 or with the toolbar button
26780 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26789 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26790 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26791 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26793 name "LyX's homepage"
26794 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26798 , an Email address like this:
26799 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26801 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26802 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26807 , or a link to a file.
26810 \begin_layout Standard
26811 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26824 to the link target.
26827 \begin_layout Standard
26828 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26829 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26830 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26831 the text style dialog.
26832 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26836 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26838 name "LyX's homepage"
26839 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26846 \begin_layout Standard
26847 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26851 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26853 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26854 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26858 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26860 \begin_inset Newline newline
26868 \begin_inset Newline newline
26875 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26878 \begin_layout Section
26880 \begin_inset Index idx
26883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26892 name "sec:Appendices"
26899 \begin_layout Standard
26900 Appendices are created with the menu
26902 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26904 \begin_inset space ~
26908 \begin_inset space ~
26914 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26915 as the appendix part of the book.
26916 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26919 \begin_layout Standard
26920 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26921 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26922 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26923 and the subsection number.
26924 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26928 \begin_layout Standard
26930 \begin_inset space ~
26934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26936 reference "chap:Credits"
26941 \begin_inset space ~
26945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26947 reference "sub:Export"
26954 \begin_layout Section
26956 \begin_inset Index idx
26959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26968 name "sec:Bibliography"
26975 \begin_layout Standard
26976 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26977 You can include a bibliography database,
26981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26982 Known under the name
26983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26995 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26996 manually, using the paragraph environment
27000 , which was described in section
27001 \begin_inset space ~
27005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27007 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
27012 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27013 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27017 use a bibliography database.
27020 \begin_layout Subsection
27021 The Bibliography Environment
27024 \begin_layout Standard
27029 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27031 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27040 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27042 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
27044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27051 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27054 \begin_layout Standard
27055 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27057 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27060 or the toolbar button
27063 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27067 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27068 containing the available citations.
27069 Select one or more keys from the list and
27079 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27080 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27084 \begin_layout Standard
27085 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27086 entry with surrounding brackets.
27091 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27092 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27104 \begin_layout Standard
27107 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
27110 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27112 key "latexcompanion"
27119 \begin_layout Standard
27120 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
27121 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27130 \begin_layout Standard
27131 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27134 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27136 \begin_inset space ~
27144 arg "layout-paragraph"
27148 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27151 \begin_layout Subsection
27152 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27153 \begin_inset Index idx
27156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27157 Bibliography ! Databases
27163 \begin_inset Index idx
27166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27167 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27175 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27182 \begin_layout Standard
27183 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27189 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27191 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27192 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27197 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27199 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27200 your working field in a database.
27201 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27202 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27203 list for that document.
27204 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27208 \begin_layout Standard
27209 The database is a text file with the file extension
27210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27221 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27222 The format is explained in
27223 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27229 and in the LaTeX books (
27230 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27232 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27237 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27238 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27239 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27240 \begin_inset Flex URL
27243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27245 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27253 \begin_layout Standard
27254 To use a database, use the menu
27256 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27261 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27274 \begin_inset space ~
27280 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27281 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27288 Add bibliography to TOC
27290 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27295 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27296 in the document or just the cited references.
27299 \begin_layout Standard
27300 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27312 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27313 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27314 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27316 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27322 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27323 \begin_inset Newline newline
27327 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27329 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27341 \begin_layout Standard
27342 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27345 \begin_layout Standard
27346 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27347 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27353 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27354 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27359 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27360 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27361 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27376 The following variants are possible:
27379 \begin_layout Description
27380 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27381 with other bibliography packages (e.
27382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27386 \begin_inset space \space{}
27393 ), only with the package
27397 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27401 \begin_layout Description
27402 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27403 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27404 with all bibliography packages, except
27409 \begin_layout Description
27410 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27415 , works with all bibliography packages
27418 \begin_layout Standard
27419 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27421 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27427 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27436 \begin_layout Standard
27437 When you select the option
27439 Sectioned bibliography
27443 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27444 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27447 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27448 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27450 Customizing Bibliographies
27458 Additional Features
27463 \begin_layout Standard
27464 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27465 the two methods of creating them.
27466 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27467 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27468 We used the style file
27472 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27475 \begin_layout Subsection
27476 Bibliography layout
27477 \begin_inset Index idx
27480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27481 Bibliography ! Layout
27489 \begin_layout Standard
27490 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27491 For this feature you need to enable the option
27497 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27501 \begin_inset Index idx
27504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27505 Document ! Settings
27515 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27516 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27517 in the previous section.
27520 \begin_layout Standard
27521 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27522 the citation reference window.
27523 Here is an example where the text
27524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27528 \begin_inset space ~
27532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27535 appears after the reference:
27538 \begin_layout Standard
27540 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27543 key "latexcompanion"
27550 \begin_layout Section
27552 \begin_inset Index idx
27555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27571 \begin_layout Standard
27572 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27574 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27576 \begin_inset space ~
27581 or the toolbar button
27588 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27589 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27590 by LyX as the index entry.
27593 \begin_layout Standard
27594 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27596 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27597 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27599 \begin_inset space ~
27605 A light blue box labeled
27606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27617 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27618 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27621 \begin_layout Standard
27622 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27623 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27625 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27627 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27634 \begin_layout Subsection
27635 Grouping Index Entries
27636 \begin_inset Index idx
27639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27648 \begin_layout Standard
27649 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27651 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27652 lists under the entry
27653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27661 First we create the entry
27662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27670 \begin_inset space ~
27674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27676 reference "sub:Lists"
27681 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27682 \begin_inset space ~
27686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27688 reference "sec:Itemize"
27692 , we insert the command
27695 \begin_layout Standard
27701 \begin_layout Standard
27705 \begin_layout Standard
27711 \begin_layout Standard
27712 for the enumerated list in section
27713 \begin_inset space ~
27717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27719 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27726 \begin_layout Standard
27727 The exclamation mark
27728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27735 marks the grouping levels.
27736 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27737 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27738 If we don't have an index entry for
27739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27746 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27749 \begin_layout Subsection
27751 \begin_inset Index idx
27754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27755 Index ! Page ranges
27763 \begin_layout Standard
27764 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27766 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27767 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27768 an index entry in section
27769 \begin_inset space ~
27773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27775 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27782 \begin_layout Standard
27785 Paragraph environments|(
27788 \begin_layout Standard
27789 and another entry at the end of section
27790 \begin_inset space ~
27794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27796 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27803 \begin_layout Standard
27806 Paragraph environments|)
27809 \begin_layout Standard
27811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27834 respectively start and end the index range.
27835 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27836 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27837 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27838 An example is the index entry
27839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27842 Document ! Settings
27843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27849 \begin_layout Subsection
27851 \begin_inset Index idx
27854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27855 Index ! Cross referencing
27863 \begin_layout Standard
27864 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27865 We referred for example in the index entry
27866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27874 \begin_inset space ~
27878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27880 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27884 ) to the index entry
27885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27892 in the same section using the entry
27895 \begin_layout Standard
27898 GIF|see{Image formats}
27901 \begin_layout Standard
27902 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27903 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27904 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27907 \begin_layout Subsection
27909 \begin_inset Index idx
27912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27913 Index ! Entry order
27921 \begin_layout Standard
27922 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27923 follow the rules for the index order.
27924 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27929 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27931 \begin_inset space ~
27935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27937 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27946 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27947 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27972 \begin_inset Index idx
27975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27976 Dummy entries ! maïs
27982 \begin_inset Index idx
27985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27986 Dummy entries ! maître
27992 \begin_inset Index idx
27995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27996 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28001 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28002 maïs, maison, maître.
28003 To achieve this, we use the command
28006 \begin_layout Standard
28009 previous entry@current entry
28012 \begin_layout Standard
28013 In our case we want to have
28014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28029 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28032 \begin_layout Standard
28038 \begin_layout Standard
28039 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28040 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
28041 See the next subsection for an example.
28044 \begin_layout Standard
28045 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28051 \begin_layout Standard
28052 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28057 to generate the index (see sec.
28058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28064 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28073 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
28075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28081 reference "sub:Document-Font"
28085 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
28086 index commands start with
28087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28099 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28104 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28107 \begin_layout Standard
28119 \begin_layout Standard
28131 \begin_layout Subsection
28133 \begin_inset Index idx
28136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28137 Index ! Entry layout
28145 \begin_layout Standard
28146 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28147 \begin_inset Index idx
28150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28153 This is an italic dummy entry
28158 You can also format the page number using the character
28159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28166 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28167 We can write for example
28170 \begin_layout Standard
28173 italic page number:|textit
28176 \begin_layout Standard
28177 to get the page number in italic.
28178 \begin_inset Index idx
28181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28182 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28187 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28205 \begin_inset space ~
28211 Have a look at section
28212 \begin_inset space ~
28216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28218 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28222 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28225 \begin_layout Standard
28226 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28234 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28238 to generate the index, see sec.
28239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28245 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28254 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28259 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28263 key "latexcompanion"
28275 \begin_layout Standard
28276 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28278 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28279 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28280 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28281 If so, put the following in the preamble
28284 \begin_layout Standard
28296 \begin_layout Standard
28300 \begin_layout Standard
28306 \begin_layout Standard
28307 in the index entry.
28308 \begin_inset Index idx
28311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28312 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28317 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28318 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28319 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28322 \begin_layout Standard
28323 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28324 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28325 a bold font for all index entries.
28326 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28338 documentation for details,
28339 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28341 key "makeindex,xindy"
28348 \begin_layout Subsection
28350 \begin_inset Index idx
28353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28362 name "sub:Index-Program"
28369 \begin_layout Standard
28370 If the index generation program
28374 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28378 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28387 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28388 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28389 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28390 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28391 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28401 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28402 dialog, see section
28403 \begin_inset space ~
28407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28409 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28414 The available options are listed and explained in
28415 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28417 key "makeindex,xindy"
28422 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28426 \begin_layout Standard
28427 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28428 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28431 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28432 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28436 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28437 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28440 \begin_layout Subsection
28444 \begin_layout Standard
28445 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28446 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28454 next to the standard index.
28455 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28456 that add this feature.
28462 \begin_inset Index idx
28465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28466 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28471 package to generate multiple indexes.
28472 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28477 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28478 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28485 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28486 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28487 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28495 \begin_layout Standard
28496 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28498 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28499 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28502 and select the option
28504 Use multiple Indexes
28511 already contains the standard index
28512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28520 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28521 also appear as a heading) to the
28525 input field and press the
28530 The new index now also appears in the list.
28531 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28535 \begin_layout Standard
28536 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28539 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28546 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28547 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28548 are additional features:
28551 \begin_layout Itemize
28552 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28553 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28556 \begin_layout Itemize
28557 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28558 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28566 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28567 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28568 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28569 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28572 \begin_layout Section
28573 Nomenclature/Glossary
28574 \begin_inset Index idx
28577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28584 \begin_inset Index idx
28587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28618 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28625 \begin_layout Standard
28626 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28627 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28628 called nomenclature or glossary.
28631 \begin_layout Standard
28632 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28638 \begin_inset Index idx
28641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28642 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28648 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28649 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28655 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28658 \begin_layout Standard
28659 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28660 and then use the menu
28662 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28668 \begin_inset space ~
28673 or the toolbar button
28676 arg "nomencl-insert"
28681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28692 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28695 \begin_layout Standard
28696 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28697 The first is the term or
28701 that you wish to define.
28706 of the term or symbol.
28709 \begin_layout Standard
28710 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28718 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28726 \begin_layout Subsection
28727 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28728 \begin_inset Index idx
28731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28732 Nomenclature ! Layout
28740 \begin_layout Standard
28741 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28745 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28751 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28759 \begin_inset Newline newline
28767 \begin_inset Newline newline
28773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28780 character starts/ends the formula.
28781 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28793 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28803 \begin_layout Standard
28804 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28805 \begin_inset space ~
28809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28811 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28818 \begin_layout Standard
28822 \begin_inset space ~
28827 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28828 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28833 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28840 in this document is:
28841 \begin_inset Newline newline
28846 dummy entry for the character
28851 \begin_inset Newline newline
28863 \begin_inset space ~
28873 font use the command
28902 \begin_layout Standard
28903 If the characters |
28904 \begin_inset space \space{}
28908 \begin_inset space \space{}
28912 \begin_inset space \space{}
28916 \begin_inset space \space{}
28920 \begin_inset space \space{}
28923 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28924 a quote character in front of them.
28925 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28926 LatexCommand nomenclature
28927 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28928 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28935 \begin_layout Subsection
28936 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28937 \begin_inset Index idx
28940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28941 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28949 \begin_layout Standard
28950 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28951 the symbol definition.
28952 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28954 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28957 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28958 LatexCommand nomenclature
28960 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28967 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28971 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28972 LatexCommand nomenclature
28975 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28980 They will be sorted by
28981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29007 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29010 will be sorted before the
29014 since the character
29015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29022 is considered in sorting.
29025 \begin_layout Standard
29026 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29029 \begin_inset space ~
29034 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29035 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29037 For the example given, you can insert
29041 in this field for the
29042 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29049 will be located before
29050 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29056 \begin_layout Standard
29057 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29062 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29071 \begin_layout Subsection
29072 Nomenclature Options
29073 \begin_inset Index idx
29076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29077 Nomenclature ! Options
29085 \begin_layout Standard
29090 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29091 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29094 \begin_layout Description
29095 refeq Appends the phrase
29096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29111 to every nomenclature entry, where
29117 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29120 \begin_layout Description
29121 refpage Appends the phrase
29122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29137 to every nomenclature entry, where
29143 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29146 \begin_layout Description
29147 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29150 \begin_layout Standard
29151 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29152 class options list in the
29154 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29158 In this document the options
29165 \begin_layout Standard
29166 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29172 \begin_layout Standard
29173 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29174 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29179 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29182 \begin_layout Description
29192 \begin_layout Description
29195 nomrefpage Like the
29202 \begin_layout Description
29205 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29214 \begin_layout Description
29218 \begin_inset space ~
29224 \begin_inset space ~
29229 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29232 \begin_layout Standard
29234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29241 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29242 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29245 \begin_layout Standard
29253 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29256 \begin_inset Newline newline
29263 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29268 \begin_inset Newline newline
29272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29287 by their translation.
29290 \begin_layout Subsection
29291 Printing the Nomenclature
29292 \begin_inset Index idx
29295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29296 Nomenclature ! Printing
29304 \begin_layout Standard
29305 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29307 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29308 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29324 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29325 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29326 You can choose between these settings:
29329 \begin_layout Description
29330 Default a space of 1
29331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29337 \begin_layout Description
29339 \begin_inset space ~
29343 \begin_inset space ~
29346 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29349 \begin_layout Description
29350 Custom custom space
29353 \begin_layout Standard
29354 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29363 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29371 For example, in order to change the name to
29375 , add the following line to the preamble:
29378 \begin_layout Standard
29386 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29389 \begin_layout Subsection
29390 Nomenclature Program
29391 \begin_inset Index idx
29394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29395 Nomenclature ! Program
29401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29403 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29410 \begin_layout Standard
29411 LyX uses the program
29415 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29416 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29421 by adding options, see section
29422 \begin_inset space ~
29426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29428 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29433 The available options are listed and explained in
29434 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29436 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29443 \begin_layout Section
29445 \begin_inset Index idx
29448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29455 \begin_inset Index idx
29458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29459 Document ! Branches
29465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29467 name "sec:Branches"
29474 \begin_layout Standard
29475 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29476 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29477 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29478 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29481 \begin_layout Standard
29482 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29483 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29484 To create a branch, either select the menu
29486 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29487 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29490 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29492 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29499 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29500 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29501 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29502 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29503 (see below for an example).
29504 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29505 to the name of the other) and to add
29506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29518 \begin_inset space ~
29521 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29522 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29525 \begin_layout Standard
29526 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29527 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29529 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29532 where you can choose a branch.
29533 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29537 \begin_layout Standard
29538 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29539 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29542 \begin_layout Standard
29543 \begin_inset Branch Question
29546 \begin_layout Standard
29547 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29555 \begin_layout Standard
29556 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29559 \begin_layout Standard
29560 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29568 \begin_layout Standard
29575 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29576 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29579 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29580 Consider for example a file
29581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29588 which has the above branches.
29590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29597 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29621 branch were inactive,
29622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29637 branch was active, likewise
29638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29653 branch was active, and
29654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29657 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29661 if both branches were active.
29662 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29665 \begin_layout Standard
29666 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29672 \begin_layout Standard
29673 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29674 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29676 For example you can define for the question branch
29680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29681 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29682 \begin_inset space ~
29686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29688 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29700 \begin_layout Standard
29710 \begin_layout Standard
29720 \begin_layout Standard
29721 and for the answer branch
29724 \begin_layout Standard
29734 \begin_layout Standard
29744 \begin_layout Standard
29745 \begin_inset Branch Question
29748 \begin_layout Standard
29752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29780 \begin_layout Standard
29781 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29784 \begin_layout Standard
29788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29816 \begin_layout Standard
29817 Now it is possible to use the
29821 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29828 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29831 commands to obtain conditional output.
29832 Here is an example formula where only the
29839 \begin_inset Formula
29841 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29849 \begin_layout Standard
29850 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29858 \begin_layout Standard
29859 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29865 \begin_inset space \space{}
29868 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29869 For this advanced usage, see the
29874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29877 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29884 \begin_layout Section
29886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29888 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29893 \begin_inset Index idx
29896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29905 \begin_layout Standard
29908 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29909 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29912 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29914 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29919 \begin_inset Index idx
29922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29923 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29928 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29929 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29930 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29931 part of the document.
29935 \begin_layout Standard
29936 The header information in the dialog tab
29940 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29941 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29942 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29943 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29947 \begin_inset space ~
29951 \begin_inset space ~
29956 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29957 title and author entries.
29961 \begin_inset space ~
29965 \begin_inset space ~
29969 \begin_inset space ~
29974 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29977 \begin_layout Standard
29978 You can specify in the dialog tab
29982 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29987 \begin_inset space ~
29991 \begin_inset space ~
29995 \begin_inset space ~
30000 option allows long links to be split;
30003 \begin_inset space ~
30007 \begin_inset space ~
30011 \begin_inset space ~
30019 \begin_inset space ~
30024 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30027 \begin_inset space ~
30032 colors the different links.
30033 The default colors are:
30036 \begin_layout Labeling
30037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30042 for hyperlinks and URLs
30045 \begin_layout Labeling
30046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30054 \begin_layout Labeling
30055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30063 \begin_layout Standard
30064 but you can change these in the field
30069 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30072 \begin_layout Standard
30075 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30078 \begin_layout Standard
30083 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30084 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30085 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30088 \begin_layout Standard
30093 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30094 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30095 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30105 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30106 when opening the PDF.
30108 \begin_inset space ~
30111 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30112 \begin_inset space ~
30115 1 will only display the sections.
30118 \begin_layout Standard
30119 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30120 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30126 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30127 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30136 \begin_layout Section
30137 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30140 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30147 \begin_layout Subsection
30149 \begin_inset Index idx
30152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30161 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30168 \begin_layout Standard
30169 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30170 constructs, but not all.
30171 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30172 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30173 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30174 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30175 and their commands.
30178 \begin_layout Standard
30179 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30181 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30183 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30196 \begin_inset space ~
30201 or by the toolbar button
30214 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30222 \begin_layout Standard
30223 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30224 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30225 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30226 using the LaTeX-command
30232 , you can write the command part
30238 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30242 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30243 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30244 the following example:
30247 \begin_layout Standard
30248 \begin_inset Graphics
30249 filename clipart/ERT.png
30257 \begin_layout Standard
30261 \begin_layout Standard
30262 This is a line with a
30266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30289 \begin_layout Standard
30290 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30298 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30299 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30307 \begin_layout Subsection
30308 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30309 \begin_inset Argument 1
30312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30319 \begin_inset Index idx
30322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30331 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30338 \begin_layout Standard
30339 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30340 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30341 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30350 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30351 any time if you know the right commands.
30352 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30353 is the end of the day.
30354 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30355 all caption labels bold.
30356 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30358 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30362 \begin_layout Standard
30363 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30364 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30365 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30367 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30376 \begin_layout Standard
30377 As result you find that the package
30382 \begin_inset Index idx
30385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30386 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30392 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30394 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30397 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30412 \begin_inset space ~
30420 \begin_layout Standard
30425 usepackage[options]{package name}
30428 \begin_layout Standard
30429 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30430 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30431 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30434 \begin_layout Standard
30435 In your case the package name is
30440 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30445 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30446 So you add the command
30449 \begin_layout Standard
30454 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30457 \begin_layout Standard
30458 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30463 For more commands provided by the
30467 package, have a look at its documentation,
30468 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30482 \begin_layout Standard
30483 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30485 For example if you use a
30489 class, you don't need the package
30493 , you can instead write
30496 \begin_layout Standard
30501 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30506 \begin_layout Standard
30507 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30508 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30509 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30516 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30519 \begin_layout Standard
30520 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30521 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30523 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30524 the previous section.
30527 \begin_layout Standard
30528 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30530 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30532 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30539 \begin_layout Standard
30540 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30546 \begin_layout Standard
30550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30560 \begin_inset Note Note
30563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30564 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30572 \begin_layout Left Header
30573 \begin_inset Argument 1
30576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30596 \begin_inset Note Note
30599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30600 defines the header line as described below
30608 \begin_layout Center Header
30609 \begin_inset Argument 1
30612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30621 \begin_layout Right Header
30622 \begin_inset Argument 1
30625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30646 \begin_layout Left Footer
30647 \begin_inset Argument 1
30650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30671 \begin_layout Center Footer
30672 \begin_inset Argument 1
30675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30686 \begin_inset Newline newline
30690 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30696 \begin_layout Right Footer
30697 \begin_inset Argument 1
30700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30722 \begin_layout Section
30723 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30726 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30731 \begin_inset Index idx
30734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30735 Document ! Header/Footer line
30741 \begin_inset Index idx
30744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30753 \begin_layout Standard
30754 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30758 \begin_inset space ~
30769 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30775 \begin_inset space ~
30781 As a second step add in the menu
30783 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30784 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30791 Custom Header/Footerlines
30792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30796 This module offers the following 6
30797 \begin_inset space ~
30803 \begin_layout Description
30805 \begin_inset space ~
30809 \begin_inset space ~
30813 \begin_inset space ~
30817 \begin_inset space ~
30821 \begin_inset space ~
30827 \begin_layout Description
30829 \begin_inset space ~
30833 \begin_inset space ~
30837 \begin_inset space ~
30841 \begin_inset space ~
30845 \begin_inset space ~
30851 \begin_layout Standard
30852 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30855 \begin_layout Standard
30856 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30857 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30859 \begin_inset space ~
30863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30865 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30869 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30872 \begin_layout Standard
30873 \begin_inset Float figure
30879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30882 \begin_inset Tabular
30883 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30884 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30885 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30886 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30887 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30889 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30907 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30918 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30936 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30947 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30951 The normal text on the page goes here.
30952 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30954 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30955 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30960 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30969 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30980 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30998 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31009 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31027 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31045 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31050 name "fig:Page-layout"
31054 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31067 \begin_layout Standard
31068 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31076 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31080 \begin_inset space ~
31085 is set to “Default”.
31086 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31095 \begin_layout Subsection
31099 \begin_layout Standard
31100 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31101 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31102 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31103 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31105 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31106 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31109 \begin_layout Standard
31110 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
31113 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31126 \begin_inset space ~
31134 \begin_layout Description
31137 thepage prints the current page number
31140 \begin_layout Description
31143 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31146 \begin_layout Description
31149 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31152 \begin_layout Description
31155 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31156 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31163 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31166 because it usually goes in a left header.
31169 \begin_layout Description
31172 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31173 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31175 It is normally used in the right header.
31178 \begin_layout Subsection
31179 Default header/footer
31182 \begin_layout Standard
31183 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31184 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31185 footer has the page number.
31186 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31187 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31188 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31191 \begin_inset space ~
31199 \begin_layout Subsection
31203 \begin_layout Standard
31204 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31205 Some pages are different.
31206 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31207 a new part or chapter in your book.
31208 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31209 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31210 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31214 Header and footer decoration line
31217 \begin_layout Standard
31218 By default, you get a 0.4
31219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31222 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31223 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31235 in the following way:
31238 \begin_layout Standard
31245 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31248 \begin_layout Standard
31249 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31258 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31265 \begin_layout Standard
31266 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31267 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31268 \begin_inset space ~
31272 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31281 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31282 Several header/footer lines
31285 \begin_layout Standard
31286 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31287 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31288 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31290 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31304 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31305 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31318 \begin_inset space ~
31326 \begin_layout Standard
31333 headheight}{height}
31336 \begin_layout Standard
31337 where height is a size in standard units.
31338 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31339 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31340 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31342 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31359 \begin_inset space ~
31364 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31369 \begin_inset Index idx
31372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31373 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31379 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31380 for your header/footer.
31383 \begin_layout Subsection
31387 \begin_layout Standard
31388 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31389 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31390 This example consists of the following definition:
31393 \begin_layout Description
31395 \begin_inset space ~
31404 , empty optional argument
31407 \begin_layout Description
31409 \begin_inset space ~
31412 Header empty, empty optional argument
31415 \begin_layout Description
31417 \begin_inset space ~
31426 in the optional argument
31429 \begin_layout Description
31431 \begin_inset space ~
31440 in the optional argument
31443 \begin_layout Description
31445 \begin_inset space ~
31457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31461 \begin_inset Newline newline
31465 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31472 in the optional argument
31475 \begin_layout Description
31477 \begin_inset space ~
31486 , empty optional argument
31489 \begin_layout Description
31492 headrulewidth set to 2
31493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31499 \begin_layout Standard
31500 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31501 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31507 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31516 \begin_layout Standard
31517 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31523 \begin_layout Standard
31527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31531 pagestyle{headings}
31537 \begin_inset Note Note
31540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31541 switches back to page style with the default headings
31549 \begin_layout Section
31550 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31553 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31558 \begin_inset Index idx
31561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31568 \begin_inset Index idx
31571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31580 \begin_layout Standard
31581 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31582 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31583 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31586 \begin_layout Subsection
31590 \begin_layout Standard
31591 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31596 \begin_inset Index idx
31599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31600 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31605 (on some systems named simply
31610 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31612 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31618 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31619 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31627 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31628 automatically installed together with LyX.
31631 \begin_layout Subsection
31635 \begin_layout Standard
31636 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31637 LaTeX, activate the option
31640 \begin_inset space ~
31647 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31653 \begin_inset space ~
31657 \begin_inset space ~
31660 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31667 \begin_inset space ~
31680 \begin_inset space ~
31685 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31688 \begin_layout Standard
31689 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31693 \begin_inset space ~
31701 \begin_inset space ~
31709 \begin_layout Standard
31710 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31714 \begin_layout Standard
31715 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31723 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31724 generated by activating the option
31727 \begin_inset space ~
31733 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31741 \begin_layout Subsection
31742 Selected document parts
31745 \begin_layout Standard
31746 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31747 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31748 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31749 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31751 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31755 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31756 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31757 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31760 \begin_layout Standard
31761 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31767 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31778 is explained in section
31780 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31785 \begin_inset space ~
31795 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31796 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31798 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31800 Here is the result:
31803 \begin_layout Standard
31804 \begin_inset Preview
31806 \begin_layout Standard
31811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31815 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31821 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31831 height_special "totalheight"
31834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31859 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31865 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31887 \begin_layout Standard
31888 Previewing works also for colors.
31889 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31907 is explained in section
31914 \begin_inset space ~
31927 \begin_layout Standard
31928 \begin_inset Preview
31930 \begin_layout Standard
31934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31953 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31958 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31977 \begin_layout Standard
31978 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31984 \begin_layout Standard
31985 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31986 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31987 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31989 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31990 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31991 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31992 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31996 \begin_layout Subsection
32000 \begin_layout Standard
32001 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
32004 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32006 \begin_inset space ~
32011 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
32012 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32014 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
32015 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32016 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32017 the source view window.
32022 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
32023 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
32024 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
32027 \begin_layout Section
32028 Advanced Find and Replace
32029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32031 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32036 \begin_inset Index idx
32039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32046 \begin_inset Index idx
32049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32058 \begin_layout Subsection
32062 \begin_layout Standard
32063 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
32064 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
32065 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32066 The key-features are:
32069 \begin_layout Itemize
32070 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32071 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32072 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32076 \begin_layout Itemize
32077 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32078 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32079 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32080 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32083 \begin_layout Itemize
32084 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32085 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32086 outside of mathematics environments
32089 \begin_layout Itemize
32090 Search may be widened to a specific
32095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32099 \begin_inset space ~
32102 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32103 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32110 \begin_layout Itemize
32111 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32112 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32117 \begin_inset space ~
32120 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32123 \begin_layout Subsection
32127 \begin_layout Standard
32128 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32130 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32143 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32146 ) or the toolbar button
32149 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32155 Advanced Find and Replace
32160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32164 \begin_layout Standard
32169 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32173 \begin_inset space ~
32178 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32181 arg "paragraph-break"
32185 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32186 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32190 arg "paragraph-break"
32193 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32197 searches backwards.
32200 \begin_layout Standard
32204 \begin_inset space ~
32209 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32218 \begin_inset space ~
32223 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32227 Searching for mathematics
32230 \begin_layout Standard
32231 Mathematical formulas, such as
32232 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32235 or something more complex like
32236 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32239 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32244 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32245 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32246 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32247 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32253 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32257 \begin_layout Standard
32258 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32259 This is done by switching to the
32263 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32268 This way, entering in the
32275 \begin_layout Itemize
32276 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32277 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32280 \begin_layout Itemize
32281 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32282 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32285 \begin_layout Itemize
32286 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32287 of it only within section headings.
32288 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32289 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32293 \begin_layout Itemize
32294 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32295 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32298 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32302 \begin_layout Standard
32303 The entries made in the
32307 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32310 \begin_inset space ~
32316 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32320 button or alternatively press
32323 arg "paragraph-break"
32330 while the cursor is in the
32333 \begin_inset space ~
32341 \begin_layout Standard
32342 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32343 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32347 \begin_layout Itemize
32348 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32349 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32357 with its typewriter version
32358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32372 \begin_layout Itemize
32373 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32379 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32391 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32398 (you may want to enable the
32401 \begin_inset space ~
32409 \begin_inset space ~
32414 options and disable the
32422 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32430 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32431 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32435 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32438 , or occurrences of
32439 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32443 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32449 \begin_layout Subsection
32453 \begin_layout Standard
32454 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32459 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32461 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32463 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32472 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32478 This is done with the context menu
32480 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32481 Insert Regular Expression
32483 while the cursor is in the
32488 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32489 expression matching rules
32493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32494 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32500 \begin_inset space ~
32503 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32504 to match expressions.
32509 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32510 same text in the document.
32511 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32512 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32515 \begin_layout Enumerate
32516 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32521 editor the fraction
32522 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32526 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32529 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32530 fractions with the given denominator.
32533 \begin_layout Enumerate
32534 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32546 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32551 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32552 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32553 Also, by inserting a
32554 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32557 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32558 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32561 \begin_layout Standard
32562 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32563 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32564 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32567 , and referring back to them through
32568 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32572 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32576 For example, try searching with the regexp
32577 \begin_inset Newline newline
32580 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32583 \begin_inset Newline newline
32586 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32589 \begin_layout Standard
32590 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32593 \begin_layout Standard
32594 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32602 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32603 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32604 sub-expressions is absolute.
32606 \begin_inset space ~
32610 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32613 always refers to the first occurrence of
32614 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32617 in all entered regexps.
32625 \begin_layout Section
32627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32629 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32634 \begin_inset Index idx
32637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32646 \begin_layout Standard
32647 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32650 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32657 key or the toolbar button
32660 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32663 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32664 beginning of the currently selected text.
32665 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32666 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32667 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32668 scrolled so that it is visible.
32669 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32670 n, if any could be found.
32671 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32675 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32676 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32679 \begin_layout Standard
32680 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32683 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32687 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32688 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32689 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32690 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32693 \begin_inset space ~
32701 arg "dialog-show character"
32704 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32705 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32708 \begin_layout Standard
32709 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32710 \begin_inset Newline newline
32714 \begin_inset Flex URL
32717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32719 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32725 \begin_inset Newline newline
32729 \begin_inset space ~
32732 files for each language.
32733 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32734 \begin_inset space ~
32737 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32746 \begin_inset Newline newline
32749 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32750 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32751 but in most cases these are
32767 is the language code.
32770 \begin_layout Subsection
32774 \begin_layout Standard
32777 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32778 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32780 \begin_inset space ~
32783 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32786 you can set the following things:
32789 \begin_layout Description
32791 \begin_inset space ~
32794 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32795 Depending on your platform,
32809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32810 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32811 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32826 \begin_layout Description
32828 \begin_inset space ~
32831 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32832 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32835 \begin_layout Description
32837 \begin_inset space ~
32840 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32846 \begin_inset space \space{}
32850 This should normally not be needed.
32853 \begin_layout Description
32855 \begin_inset space ~
32859 \begin_inset space ~
32862 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32874 \begin_layout Description
32876 \begin_inset space ~
32879 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32880 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32881 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32882 appear in a context menu.
32883 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32887 \begin_layout Description
32889 \begin_inset space ~
32893 \begin_inset space ~
32897 \begin_inset space ~
32900 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32904 \begin_layout Section
32906 \begin_inset Index idx
32909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32918 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32925 \begin_layout Standard
32926 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32927 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32937 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32939 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32948 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32949 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32950 which are available for many languages.
32953 \begin_layout Standard
32954 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32958 \begin_layout Subsection
32959 Setting up the thesaurus
32962 \begin_layout Standard
32971 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32975 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32980 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32986 \begin_inset space ~
32994 For instance, the US English files are named:
32997 \begin_layout Itemize
33001 \begin_layout Itemize
33005 \begin_layout Standard
33014 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33015 and you just need to point LyX (in
33017 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33018 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33019 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33021 \begin_inset space ~
33026 ) to the path where they are installed.
33030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33031 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33032 ies, typical locations are
33038 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33042 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33046 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33049 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33055 LibreOffice-<Version>
33062 On the Mac, the default location is
33064 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
33065 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33066 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
33067 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
33068 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33069 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33077 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33078 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
33079 correct place right away.
33082 \begin_layout Standard
33083 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
33084 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33088 \begin_layout Itemize
33089 \begin_inset Flex URL
33092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33094 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33102 \begin_layout Standard
33103 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33104 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33106 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33107 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33108 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33110 \begin_inset space ~
33116 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33117 and point LyX there.
33120 \begin_layout Standard
33121 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33123 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33126 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33132 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33135 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33143 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33144 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33145 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33147 \begin_inset space ~
33152 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33155 \begin_layout Subsection
33156 Using the thesaurus
33159 \begin_layout Standard
33160 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33162 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33165 or the toolbar button
33168 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33171 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33173 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33175 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33176 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33177 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33186 ), related terms (such as
33189 \begin_inset space ~
33198 ), compounds (such as
33201 \begin_inset space ~
33210 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33219 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33222 \begin_layout Standard
33223 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33224 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33228 \begin_layout Standard
33229 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33230 the dictionary, such as the above
33234 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33239 \begin_inset space \space{}
33242 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33243 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33244 For example, looking up the word form
33248 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33253 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33258 \begin_inset space \space{}
33269 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33270 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33271 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33274 \begin_layout Section
33276 \begin_inset Index idx
33279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33286 \begin_inset Index idx
33289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33290 Document ! Change Tracking
33296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33298 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33305 \begin_layout Standard
33306 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33307 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33308 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33309 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33311 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33313 \begin_inset space ~
33316 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33318 \begin_inset space ~
33326 \begin_layout Standard
33327 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33341 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33342 You can change the color in
33344 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33345 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33347 \begin_inset space ~
33351 \begin_inset space ~
33356 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33362 \begin_inset Index idx
33365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33366 Color ! Change tracking
33371 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33372 the cursor is in changed text.
33373 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33376 arg "changes-merge"
33382 \begin_layout Standard
33383 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33384 \begin_inset Index idx
33387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33396 \begin_layout Standard
33397 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33403 \begin_layout Standard
33404 \begin_inset Graphics
33405 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33413 \begin_layout Standard
33414 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33420 \begin_layout Standard
33421 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33424 \begin_layout Standard
33425 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33431 \begin_layout Standard
33432 \begin_inset Tabular
33433 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33434 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33435 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33436 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33437 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33446 arg "changes-track"
33454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33460 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33462 \begin_inset space ~
33465 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33467 \begin_inset space ~
33476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33485 arg "changes-output"
33493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33499 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33501 \begin_inset space ~
33504 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33506 \begin_inset space ~
33510 \begin_inset space ~
33514 \begin_inset space ~
33523 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33544 Jumps to the next change
33550 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33559 arg "change-accept"
33567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33573 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33575 \begin_inset space ~
33578 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33580 \begin_inset space ~
33589 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33598 arg "change-reject"
33606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33612 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33614 \begin_inset space ~
33617 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33628 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33637 arg "changes-merge"
33645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33651 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33653 \begin_inset space ~
33656 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33658 \begin_inset space ~
33667 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33676 arg "all-changes-accept"
33684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33690 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33692 \begin_inset space ~
33695 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33697 \begin_inset space ~
33701 \begin_inset space ~
33710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33719 arg "all-changes-reject"
33727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33733 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33735 \begin_inset space ~
33738 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33740 \begin_inset space ~
33744 \begin_inset space ~
33753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33776 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33777 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33790 \begin_inset space ~
33799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33822 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33824 \begin_inset space ~
33840 \begin_layout Standard
33841 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33847 \begin_layout Standard
33848 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33868 \begin_layout Standard
33869 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33870 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33871 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33872 the next change after the current cursor position.
33873 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33874 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33875 step to the next change.
33876 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33879 \begin_layout Standard
33880 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33881 to describe a change.
33884 \begin_layout Standard
33885 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33890 \begin_inset Index idx
33893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33894 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33900 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33901 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33907 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33910 \begin_layout Section
33911 Comparison of Documents
33912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33914 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33919 \begin_inset Index idx
33922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33923 Comparison of documents
33931 \begin_layout Standard
33932 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33934 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33938 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33940 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33941 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33945 \begin_inset space ~
33949 \begin_inset space ~
33953 \begin_inset space ~
33962 \begin_inset space ~
33966 \begin_inset space ~
33970 \begin_inset space ~
33974 \begin_inset space ~
33978 \begin_inset space ~
33982 \begin_inset space ~
33987 enables the change tracking option
33990 \begin_inset space ~
33994 \begin_inset space ~
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34003 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34006 \begin_layout Section
34007 International Support
34008 \begin_inset Index idx
34011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34012 International support
34020 \begin_layout Standard
34021 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
34022 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34023 up LyX to use them:
34024 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34026 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34033 \begin_layout Standard
34034 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34035 \begin_inset space ~
34039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34041 reference "sub:Special-Character"
34048 \begin_layout Subsection
34050 \begin_inset Index idx
34053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34060 \begin_inset Index idx
34063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34064 Document ! Settings
34070 \begin_inset Index idx
34073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34074 Document ! Language
34082 \begin_layout Standard
34085 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34086 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34089 dialog lets you set
34091 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34096 \begin_layout Standard
34101 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
34105 \begin_inset space ~
34110 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34111 For details about the different encoding options see section
34112 \begin_inset space ~
34116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34118 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34125 \begin_layout Subsection
34126 Keyboard mapping configuration
34127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34129 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34136 \begin_layout Standard
34137 If you have for example a U.
34138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34141 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34142 can use an alternate keymap.
34143 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34144 use an Italian keymap.
34147 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34148 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34149 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34152 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34153 \begin_inset space ~
34157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34159 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34164 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34165 which one you want to use.
34168 \begin_layout Standard
34169 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34170 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34171 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34175 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34176 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34177 one to support the characters you want.
34178 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34185 \begin_layout Chapter
34188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34190 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34197 \begin_layout Standard
34198 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34199 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34200 topic inside the user's guide.
34203 \begin_layout Section
34205 \begin_inset Index idx
34208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34217 \begin_layout Standard
34222 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34225 \begin_layout Subsection
34229 \begin_layout Standard
34230 Creates a new document.
34233 \begin_layout Subsection
34237 \begin_layout Standard
34238 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34239 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34240 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34243 \begin_layout Subsection
34247 \begin_layout Standard
34251 \begin_layout Subsection
34255 \begin_layout Standard
34256 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34257 Click there on a file to open it.
34260 \begin_layout Subsection
34264 \begin_layout Standard
34265 Closes the current document.
34268 \begin_layout Subsection
34272 \begin_layout Standard
34273 Closes all opened documents.
34276 \begin_layout Subsection
34280 \begin_layout Standard
34281 Saves the actual document.
34284 \begin_layout Subsection
34288 \begin_layout Standard
34289 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34292 \begin_layout Subsection
34296 \begin_layout Standard
34297 Saves all opened documents.
34300 \begin_layout Subsection
34304 \begin_layout Standard
34305 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34308 \begin_layout Subsection
34312 \begin_layout Standard
34313 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34314 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34315 It is described in the section
34317 Version Control in LyX
34321 Additional Features
34326 \begin_layout Subsection
34330 \begin_layout Standard
34331 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34332 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34334 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34337 \begin_layout Standard
34338 When using the menu entry
34341 \begin_inset space ~
34346 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34350 \begin_inset space ~
34354 \begin_inset space ~
34358 \begin_inset space ~
34363 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34364 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34367 \begin_layout Subsection
34369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34378 \begin_layout Standard
34379 You can export your document to various file formats.
34380 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34381 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34382 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34385 \begin_layout Standard
34386 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34388 \begin_inset space ~
34392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34394 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34401 \begin_layout Description
34407 \begin_inset space ~
34414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34421 yX format of the special LyX
34422 \begin_inset space ~
34425 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34426 \begin_inset Newline newline
34429 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34432 \begin_layout Description
34433 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34439 \begin_layout Description
34441 \begin_inset space ~
34444 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34450 \begin_layout Description
34451 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34452 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34453 files paths or file names in your document.
34454 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34461 \begin_layout Description
34462 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34463 in files paths or file names
34466 \begin_layout Description
34468 \begin_inset space ~
34475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34482 eX) DVI-format using the program
34486 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34489 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34497 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34505 \begin_layout Description
34507 \begin_inset space ~
34510 (cropped) the same as
34514 but with cropped page margins.
34517 \begin_layout Description
34519 \begin_inset space ~
34522 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34526 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34531 \begin_layout Description
34532 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34536 \begin_layout Description
34538 \begin_inset space ~
34542 \begin_inset space ~
34545 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34549 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34557 \begin_layout Description
34564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34572 \begin_inset space ~
34583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34596 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34601 \begin_layout Description
34608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34616 \begin_inset space ~
34621 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34622 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34626 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34629 \begin_layout Description
34636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34644 \begin_inset space ~
34649 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34650 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34658 \begin_layout Description
34665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34673 \begin_inset space ~
34684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34697 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34702 \begin_layout Description
34704 \begin_inset space ~
34708 \begin_inset space ~
34717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34726 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34727 music notation software
34732 \begin_layout Description
34739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34749 \begin_inset space ~
34752 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (e.
34753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34757 \begin_inset space \space{}
34761 \begin_inset space ~
34765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34780 represent the version number)
34783 \begin_layout Description
34790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34800 \begin_inset space ~
34804 \begin_inset space ~
34807 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34808 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34809 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34812 \begin_layout Description
34819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34828 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34831 \begin_layout Description
34832 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34837 \begin_layout Description
34838 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34840 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34843 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34847 \begin_layout Description
34849 \begin_inset space ~
34852 (cropped) the same as
34855 \begin_inset space ~
34860 but with cropped page margins.
34863 \begin_layout Description
34867 \begin_inset space ~
34872 PDF-format using the program
34876 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34879 \begin_layout Description
34883 \begin_inset space ~
34890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34899 PDF-format using the program
34903 , produces PDF-files directly
34906 \begin_layout Description
34910 \begin_inset space ~
34915 PDF-format using the program
34919 , produces PDF-files directly
34922 \begin_layout Description
34926 \begin_inset space ~
34931 PDF-format using the program
34935 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34938 \begin_layout Description
34942 \begin_inset space ~
34949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34958 PDF-format using the program
34962 , produces PDF-files directly
34965 \begin_layout Description
34969 \begin_inset space ~
34977 \begin_layout Description
34981 \begin_inset space ~
34985 \begin_inset space ~
34990 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34991 and then exported as text using the program
34996 \begin_layout Description
35001 PostScript format using the program
35006 \begin_layout Description
35007 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
35008 programming language
35021 it is possible to use
35028 \begin_layout Standard
35029 If one of the menu entries
35036 \begin_inset space ~
35045 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
35046 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
35047 \begin_inset space ~
35051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35053 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35058 \begin_inset Index idx
35061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35062 Reconfiguration of LyX
35070 \begin_layout Subsection
35074 \begin_layout Standard
35075 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
35076 format or send it to a printer.
35077 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
35078 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
35084 For more information have a look at section
35085 \begin_inset space ~
35089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35091 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
35098 \begin_layout Subsection
35102 \begin_layout Standard
35103 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35104 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
35105 prefix, see section
35106 \begin_inset space ~
35110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35112 reference "sec:Paths"
35117 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35126 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35127 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
35128 \begin_inset space ~
35132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35134 reference "sub:Converters"
35141 \begin_layout Subsection
35142 New and Close Window
35145 \begin_layout Standard
35146 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
35149 \begin_layout Subsection
35153 \begin_layout Standard
35154 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35157 \begin_layout Section
35159 \begin_inset Index idx
35162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35171 \begin_layout Subsection
35175 \begin_layout Standard
35176 Described in section
35177 \begin_inset space ~
35181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35183 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35190 \begin_layout Subsection
35191 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35194 \begin_layout Standard
35195 Described in section
35196 \begin_inset space ~
35200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35202 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35209 \begin_layout Subsection
35213 \begin_layout Standard
35214 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35215 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35218 \begin_layout Subsection
35222 \begin_layout Standard
35223 Selects the whole document.
35226 \begin_layout Subsection
35227 Find & Replace (Quick)
35230 \begin_layout Standard
35231 Described in section
35232 \begin_inset space ~
35236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35238 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35245 \begin_layout Subsection
35246 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35249 \begin_layout Standard
35250 Described in section
35251 \begin_inset space ~
35255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35257 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35264 \begin_layout Subsection
35265 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35268 \begin_layout Standard
35269 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35273 \begin_layout Subsection
35277 \begin_layout Standard
35278 Described in section
35279 \begin_inset space ~
35283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35285 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35292 \begin_layout Subsection
35294 \begin_inset Index idx
35297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35298 Paragraph ! Settings
35306 \begin_layout Standard
35307 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35308 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35312 \begin_layout Standard
35313 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35314 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35321 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35323 \begin_inset space ~
35331 \begin_layout Subsection
35335 \begin_layout Standard
35336 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35337 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35338 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35342 \begin_layout Standard
35343 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35345 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35346 The properties of tables are described in section
35347 \begin_inset space ~
35351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35353 reference "sec:Tables"
35357 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35358 \begin_inset space ~
35362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35364 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35371 \begin_layout Subsection
35372 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35375 \begin_layout Standard
35376 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35378 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35379 \begin_inset space ~
35383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35385 reference "sec:Nesting"
35390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35392 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35399 \begin_layout Subsection
35402 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35405 \begin_layout Standard
35406 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35407 nts of the same type.
35409 \begin_inset space ~
35413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35415 reference "sub:Separate-Nestings"
35419 for an explanation.
35422 \begin_layout Section
35424 \begin_inset Index idx
35427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35436 \begin_layout Standard
35437 At the bottom of the
35441 menu the opened documents are listed.
35444 \begin_layout Subsection
35445 Open/Close all Insets
35448 \begin_layout Standard
35449 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35452 \begin_layout Subsection
35453 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35456 \begin_layout Standard
35457 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35460 \begin_layout Standard
35461 Math macros are described in the
35468 \begin_layout Subsection
35472 \begin_layout Standard
35473 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35474 \begin_inset space ~
35478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35480 reference "sec:Navigating"
35485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35487 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35494 \begin_layout Subsection
35498 \begin_layout Standard
35499 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35501 \begin_inset space ~
35505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35507 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35514 \begin_layout Subsection
35518 \begin_layout Standard
35519 Opens a window showing console messages.
35520 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35524 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35525 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35528 \begin_layout Subsection
35530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35532 name "sub:Toolbars"
35537 \begin_inset Index idx
35540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35549 \begin_layout Standard
35550 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35551 All toolbars and the
35554 \begin_inset space ~
35559 can be turned on and off.
35564 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35576 \begin_inset space ~
35588 \begin_inset space ~
35593 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35597 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35604 \begin_layout Standard
35609 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35613 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35614 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35615 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35616 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35617 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35620 \begin_layout Standard
35621 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35622 \begin_inset space ~
35626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35628 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35635 \begin_layout Subsection
35639 \begin_layout Standard
35643 \begin_inset space ~
35647 \begin_inset space ~
35651 \begin_inset space ~
35655 \begin_inset space ~
35659 \begin_inset space ~
35663 \begin_inset space ~
35668 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35671 \begin_inset space ~
35675 \begin_inset space ~
35679 \begin_inset space ~
35683 \begin_inset space ~
35687 \begin_inset space ~
35691 \begin_inset space ~
35696 will split it horizontally.
35697 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35698 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35699 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35700 three or more documents at the same time.
35701 To close a split view, use the menu
35704 \begin_inset space ~
35708 \begin_inset space ~
35716 \begin_layout Subsection
35720 \begin_layout Standard
35721 Closes a split view.
35724 \begin_layout Subsection
35728 \begin_layout Standard
35729 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35730 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35731 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35732 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35733 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35736 \begin_layout Section
35738 \begin_inset Index idx
35741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35750 \begin_layout Subsection
35754 \begin_layout Standard
35755 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35756 \begin_inset space ~
35760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35762 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35773 \begin_layout Subsection
35775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35777 name "sub:Special-Character"
35784 \begin_layout Standard
35785 Here you can insert the following characters:
35788 \begin_layout Description
35793 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35795 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35796 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35797 You can get a complete display by checking
35800 \begin_inset space ~
35806 \begin_inset Newline newline
35810 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35818 Not all characters will be visible in the
35822 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35830 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35834 ) can display every character.
35842 \begin_layout Description
35843 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35847 \begin_layout Description
35849 \begin_inset space ~
35853 \begin_inset space ~
35856 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35857 \begin_inset space ~
35861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35863 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35870 \begin_layout Description
35872 \begin_inset space ~
35875 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35878 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35879 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35885 \begin_layout Description
35887 \begin_inset space ~
35890 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35893 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35894 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35900 \begin_layout Description
35902 \begin_inset space ~
35905 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35909 \begin_layout Description
35911 \begin_inset space ~
35914 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35918 \begin_layout Description
35920 \begin_inset space ~
35923 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35929 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35935 \begin_layout Description
35937 \begin_inset space ~
35940 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35944 \begin_layout Description
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35950 \begin_inset Index idx
35953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35960 \begin_inset Index idx
35963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35964 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35969 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35970 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35972 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35977 \begin_inset Index idx
35980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35981 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35987 \begin_inset Newline newline
35990 More information about this feature can be found in the
35996 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36002 \begin_layout Subsection
36006 \begin_layout Standard
36007 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36010 \begin_layout Description
36011 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36012 \begin_inset script superscript
36014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36023 \begin_layout Description
36024 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36025 \begin_inset script subscript
36027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36036 \begin_layout Description
36038 \begin_inset space ~
36041 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36042 \begin_inset space ~
36046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36048 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
36055 \begin_layout Description
36057 \begin_inset space ~
36060 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36061 \begin_inset space ~
36065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36067 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
36074 \begin_layout Description
36076 \begin_inset space ~
36079 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36080 \begin_inset space ~
36084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36086 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
36093 \begin_layout Description
36095 \begin_inset space ~
36098 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36104 \begin_inset space \space{}
36107 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36108 An example from the LyX
36113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36116 To insert a fraction use the command
36121 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36125 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36134 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36141 \begin_layout Description
36143 \begin_inset space ~
36146 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36147 \begin_inset space ~
36151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36153 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
36160 \begin_layout Description
36162 \begin_inset space ~
36165 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36166 \begin_inset space ~
36170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36172 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
36179 \begin_layout Description
36181 \begin_inset space ~
36184 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36185 \begin_inset space ~
36189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36191 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36198 \begin_layout Description
36199 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36206 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36213 \begin_layout Description
36215 \begin_inset space ~
36218 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36219 \begin_inset space ~
36223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36225 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36232 \begin_layout Description
36234 \begin_inset space ~
36237 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36244 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36251 \begin_layout Description
36253 \begin_inset space ~
36257 \begin_inset space ~
36260 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36261 \begin_inset space ~
36265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36267 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36274 \begin_layout Description
36276 \begin_inset space ~
36279 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36280 as described in section
36281 \begin_inset space ~
36285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36287 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36294 \begin_layout Description
36296 \begin_inset space ~
36299 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36300 \begin_inset space ~
36304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36306 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36313 \begin_layout Description
36315 \begin_inset space ~
36318 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36319 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36321 \begin_inset space ~
36325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36327 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36334 \begin_layout Description
36336 \begin_inset space ~
36339 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36340 \begin_inset space ~
36344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36346 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36353 \begin_layout Description
36355 \begin_inset space ~
36359 \begin_inset space ~
36362 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36363 \begin_inset space ~
36367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36369 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36376 \begin_layout Subsection
36380 \begin_layout Standard
36381 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36385 \begin_inset space ~
36406 are described in section
36407 \begin_inset space ~
36411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36413 reference "sec:toc"
36422 is described in section
36423 \begin_inset space ~
36427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36429 reference "sec:Index"
36437 is described in section
36438 \begin_inset space ~
36442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36444 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36450 BibTeX Bibliography
36452 is described in section
36453 \begin_inset space ~
36457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36459 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36466 \begin_layout Subsection
36470 \begin_layout Standard
36471 To insert floats, as described in section
36472 \begin_inset space ~
36476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36478 reference "sec:Floats"
36482 and in detail the chapter
36489 \begin_inset space ~
36497 \begin_layout Subsection
36501 \begin_layout Standard
36502 To insert notes, described in section
36503 \begin_inset space ~
36507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36509 reference "sec:Notes"
36516 \begin_layout Subsection
36520 \begin_layout Standard
36521 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36523 Branches are described in section
36524 \begin_inset space ~
36528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36530 reference "sec:Branches"
36537 \begin_layout Subsection
36541 \begin_layout Standard
36542 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36543 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36545 An example is the document class
36546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36553 with three custom insets.
36556 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36560 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36566 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36569 \begin_layout Subsection
36571 \begin_inset Index idx
36574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36583 \begin_layout Standard
36584 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36586 For more information see chapter
36588 External Document Parts
36591 \begin_inset space ~
36597 \begin_layout Subsection
36599 \begin_inset Index idx
36602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36611 \begin_layout Standard
36612 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36613 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36620 \begin_inset space ~
36628 \begin_layout Subsection
36632 \begin_layout Standard
36637 dialog as described in section
36638 \begin_inset space ~
36642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36644 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36651 \begin_layout Subsection
36655 \begin_layout Standard
36660 as described in section
36661 \begin_inset space ~
36665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36667 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36674 \begin_layout Subsection
36678 \begin_layout Standard
36683 as described in section
36684 \begin_inset space ~
36688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36690 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36697 \begin_layout Subsection
36699 \begin_inset Index idx
36702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36709 \begin_inset Index idx
36712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36713 Longtables ! Caption
36721 \begin_layout Standard
36722 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36723 Floats are described in section
36724 \begin_inset space ~
36728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36730 reference "sec:Floats"
36734 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36741 \begin_inset space ~
36749 \begin_layout Subsection
36753 \begin_layout Standard
36754 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36755 \begin_inset space ~
36759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36761 reference "sec:Index"
36768 \begin_layout Subsection
36772 \begin_layout Standard
36773 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36774 \begin_inset space ~
36778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36780 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36787 \begin_layout Subsection
36791 \begin_layout Standard
36792 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36793 Tables are described in section
36794 \begin_inset space ~
36798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36800 reference "sec:Tables"
36804 and in detail in the chapter
36811 \begin_inset space ~
36819 \begin_layout Subsection
36823 \begin_layout Standard
36829 Graphics are described in section
36830 \begin_inset space ~
36834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36836 reference "sec:Graphics"
36843 \begin_layout Subsection
36847 \begin_layout Standard
36848 Inserts a URL as described in section
36849 \begin_inset space ~
36853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36855 reference "sub:URLs"
36862 \begin_layout Subsection
36866 \begin_layout Standard
36867 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36868 \begin_inset space ~
36872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36874 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36881 \begin_layout Subsection
36885 \begin_layout Standard
36886 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36887 \begin_inset space ~
36891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36893 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36900 \begin_layout Subsection
36904 \begin_layout Standard
36905 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36906 \begin_inset space ~
36910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36912 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36919 \begin_layout Subsection
36923 \begin_layout Standard
36924 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36925 title or caption of a float.
36926 Inserts a short title as described in section
36927 \begin_inset space ~
36931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36933 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36940 \begin_layout Subsection
36944 \begin_layout Standard
36945 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36946 \begin_inset space ~
36950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36952 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36959 \begin_layout Subsection
36961 \begin_inset Index idx
36964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36973 \begin_layout Standard
36974 Inserts a program listings box.
36975 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36977 Program Code Listings
36982 \begin_inset space ~
36990 \begin_layout Subsection
36994 \begin_layout Standard
36995 Inserts the actual date.
36996 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36998 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37006 \begin_inset space ~
37014 \begin_layout Subsection
37018 \begin_layout Standard
37019 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37020 \begin_inset space ~
37024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37026 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37033 \begin_layout Section
37035 \begin_inset Index idx
37038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37047 \begin_layout Standard
37048 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37049 \begin_inset space ~
37052 of the current document.
37053 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37056 \begin_layout Subsection
37060 \begin_layout Standard
37061 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37062 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37063 to jump, for example, between section
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37068 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37069 \begin_inset space ~
37072 2.5 and use the submenu
37075 \begin_inset space ~
37079 \begin_inset space ~
37086 \begin_inset space ~
37092 \begin_inset space ~
37096 \begin_inset space ~
37102 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37106 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37112 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37115 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37118 \begin_layout Standard
37119 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37123 \begin_inset space ~
37128 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37136 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37139 \begin_layout Subsection
37140 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37143 \begin_layout Standard
37144 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37148 \begin_layout Subsection
37152 \begin_layout Standard
37153 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37154 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37155 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37163 \begin_inset space ~
37171 \begin_layout Subsection
37175 \begin_layout Standard
37176 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37179 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37181 \begin_inset space ~
37189 \begin_inset space ~
37194 manual for a detailed description.
37197 \begin_layout Section
37199 \begin_inset Index idx
37202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37211 \begin_layout Subsection
37215 \begin_layout Standard
37216 Change Tracking is described in section
37217 \begin_inset space ~
37221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37223 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37230 \begin_layout Subsection
37235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37245 \begin_layout Standard
37246 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37248 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37249 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37250 to the clipboard or update the view.
37251 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37254 \begin_layout Subsection
37255 Start Appendix Here
37258 \begin_layout Standard
37259 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37260 as described in section
37261 \begin_inset space ~
37265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37267 reference "sec:Appendices"
37274 \begin_layout Subsection
37276 \begin_inset space ~
37282 \begin_layout Standard
37283 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37284 default output format for the document (menu
37286 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37287 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37288 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37290 \begin_inset space ~
37294 \begin_inset space ~
37300 \begin_inset space ~
37304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37306 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37310 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37312 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37313 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37315 \begin_inset space ~
37318 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37320 \begin_inset space ~
37323 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37325 \begin_inset space ~
37329 \begin_inset space ~
37335 \begin_inset space ~
37339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37341 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37345 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37346 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37348 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37349 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37351 \begin_inset space ~
37354 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37356 \begin_inset space ~
37359 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37363 \begin_inset space ~
37367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37369 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37374 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37375 The default output format is
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37386 \begin_layout Subsection
37387 View (Other Formats)
37390 \begin_layout Standard
37391 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37392 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37393 actual document with an external program.
37394 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37395 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37396 All possible formats are listed in section
37397 \begin_inset space ~
37401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37403 reference "sub:Export"
37408 You should at least see the menu entry
37413 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37414 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37421 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37426 \begin_inset Index idx
37429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37430 Reconfiguration of LyX
37438 \begin_layout Standard
37439 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37440 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37442 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37443 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37445 \begin_inset space ~
37448 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37450 \begin_inset space ~
37453 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37457 \begin_inset space ~
37461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37463 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37468 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37471 \begin_layout Subsection
37473 \begin_inset space ~
37479 \begin_layout Standard
37480 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37481 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37484 \begin_layout Subsection
37485 Update (Other Formats)
37488 \begin_layout Standard
37489 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37490 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37493 \begin_layout Subsection
37494 View Master Document
37497 \begin_layout Standard
37498 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37514 \begin_inset space ~
37519 manual for more information on this topic).
37520 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37521 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37525 \begin_inset space ~
37529 \begin_inset space ~
37534 generates the output of the whole book, while
37538 will just output the chapter alone.
37541 \begin_layout Standard
37542 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37543 in the document settings (menu
37545 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37546 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37547 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37549 \begin_inset space ~
37553 \begin_inset space ~
37559 \begin_inset space ~
37563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37565 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37569 ) or in the preferences (menu
37571 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37572 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37574 \begin_inset space ~
37577 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37579 \begin_inset space ~
37582 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37584 \begin_inset space ~
37588 \begin_inset space ~
37594 \begin_inset space ~
37598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37600 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37607 \begin_layout Subsection
37608 Update Master Document
37611 \begin_layout Standard
37612 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37633 manual for more information on this topic).
37634 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37635 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37638 \begin_layout Standard
37639 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37640 in the document settings (menu
37642 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37643 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37644 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37646 \begin_inset space ~
37650 \begin_inset space ~
37656 \begin_inset space ~
37660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37662 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37666 ) or in the preferences (menu
37668 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37669 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37671 \begin_inset space ~
37674 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37676 \begin_inset space ~
37679 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37681 \begin_inset space ~
37685 \begin_inset space ~
37691 \begin_inset space ~
37695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37697 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37704 \begin_layout Subsection
37708 \begin_layout Standard
37709 Un/compresses the current document.
37712 \begin_layout Subsection
37716 \begin_layout Standard
37717 The document settings are described in appendix
37718 \begin_inset space ~
37722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37724 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37731 \begin_layout Section
37733 \begin_inset Index idx
37736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37745 \begin_layout Subsection
37749 \begin_layout Standard
37750 Spell checking is explained in section
37751 \begin_inset space ~
37755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37757 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37764 \begin_layout Subsection
37768 \begin_layout Standard
37769 The thesaurus is described in section
37770 \begin_inset space ~
37774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37776 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37783 \begin_layout Subsection
37785 \begin_inset Index idx
37788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37795 \begin_inset Index idx
37798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37807 \begin_layout Standard
37808 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37809 the highlighted document part.
37812 \begin_layout Subsection
37817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37825 \begin_inset Index idx
37828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37837 \begin_layout Standard
37838 Generates with the help of the program
37842 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37843 This feature is not available on Windows.
37846 \begin_layout Subsection
37851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37859 \begin_inset Index idx
37862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37871 \begin_layout Standard
37872 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37877 \begin_inset space ~
37882 to see the full filename paths.
37885 \begin_layout Subsection
37887 \begin_inset Index idx
37890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37899 \begin_layout Standard
37900 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37901 \begin_inset space ~
37905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37907 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37914 \begin_layout Subsection
37916 \begin_inset Index idx
37919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37920 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37931 Reconfiguration of LyX
37935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37948 \begin_inset Index idx
37951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37952 Reconfiguration of LyX
37960 \begin_layout Standard
37961 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37962 needs; see also section
37963 \begin_inset space ~
37967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37969 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37976 \begin_layout Subsection
37980 \begin_layout Standard
37985 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37986 \begin_inset space ~
37990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37992 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37999 \begin_layout Section
38001 \begin_inset Index idx
38004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38013 \begin_layout Standard
38014 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
38016 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38020 \begin_layout Standard
38024 \begin_inset space ~
38029 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
38030 found by LyX (see also section
38031 \begin_inset space ~
38035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38037 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38048 \begin_inset space ~
38055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38064 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
38068 \begin_layout Section
38070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38072 name "sec:Toolbars"
38079 \begin_layout Standard
38080 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38081 \begin_inset space ~
38085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38087 reference "sub:Toolbars"
38094 \begin_layout Standard
38095 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38096 This is described in the
38098 Additional Features
38103 \begin_layout Subsection
38105 \begin_inset Index idx
38108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38117 \begin_layout Standard
38118 \begin_inset Graphics
38119 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38127 \begin_layout Standard
38128 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38134 \begin_layout Standard
38135 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38152 \begin_inset Note Note
38155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38156 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38161 manual for more information.
38169 \begin_layout Standard
38170 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38176 \begin_layout Standard
38177 \begin_inset Tabular
38178 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38179 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38181 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38187 \begin_inset Graphics
38188 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38202 pull-down box for the environments
38215 \begin_layout Standard
38216 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38222 \begin_layout Standard
38224 \begin_inset Tabular
38225 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38226 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38227 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38228 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38229 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38252 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38282 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38289 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38312 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38319 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38328 arg "dialog-show print"
38336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38342 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38358 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38372 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38379 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38402 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38409 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38432 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38439 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38462 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38469 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38492 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38499 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38522 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38529 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38538 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38552 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38578 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38592 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38602 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38611 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38620 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38634 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38635 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38642 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38663 Emphasize text, function of the
38665 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38667 \begin_inset space ~
38670 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38700 Set text to noun style, function of the
38702 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38704 \begin_inset space ~
38707 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38716 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38725 arg "textstyle-apply"
38733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38737 Format text using the current settings in the
38739 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38741 \begin_inset space ~
38744 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38776 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38777 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38779 \begin_inset space ~
38788 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38797 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38811 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38825 arg "tabular-insert"
38833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38839 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38846 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38855 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38867 Toggle outline window on/off,
38869 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38885 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38897 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38912 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38924 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38937 \begin_layout Subsection
38939 \begin_inset Index idx
38942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38951 \begin_layout Standard
38952 \begin_inset Graphics
38953 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38961 \begin_layout Standard
38962 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38968 \begin_layout Standard
38969 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38973 \begin_layout Standard
38974 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38980 \begin_layout Standard
38981 \begin_inset Tabular
38982 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38983 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38984 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38985 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39022 arg "layout Enumerate"
39030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39049 arg "layout Itemize"
39057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39067 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39103 arg "layout Description"
39111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39121 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39130 arg "depth-increment"
39138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39144 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39146 \begin_inset space ~
39150 \begin_inset space ~
39159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39168 arg "depth-decrement"
39176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39182 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39184 \begin_inset space ~
39188 \begin_inset space ~
39197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39206 arg "float-insert figure"
39214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39220 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39221 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39228 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39237 arg "float-insert table"
39245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39251 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39252 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39282 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39289 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39298 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39312 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39319 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39328 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39342 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39372 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39374 \begin_inset space ~
39383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39392 arg "nomencl-insert"
39400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39406 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39408 \begin_inset space ~
39417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39426 arg "footnote-insert"
39434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39440 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39447 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39456 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39470 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39481 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39504 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39505 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39518 \begin_inset space ~
39527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39536 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39550 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39580 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39587 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39610 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39627 \begin_inset space ~
39636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39645 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39659 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39660 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39667 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39676 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39690 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39691 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39693 \begin_inset space ~
39702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39711 arg "dialog-show character"
39719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39725 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39727 \begin_inset space ~
39730 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39737 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39746 arg "layout-paragraph"
39754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39760 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39762 \begin_inset space ~
39771 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39780 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39794 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39808 \begin_layout Subsection
39809 View/Update Toolbar
39810 \begin_inset Index idx
39813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39814 Toolbar ! View / Update
39822 \begin_layout Standard
39823 \begin_inset Graphics
39824 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39831 \begin_layout Standard
39832 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39838 \begin_layout Standard
39839 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39843 \begin_layout Standard
39844 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39850 \begin_layout Standard
39851 \begin_inset Tabular
39852 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39853 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39854 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39855 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39879 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39895 arg "buffer-update"
39903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39909 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39925 arg "master-buffer-view"
39933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39939 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39941 \begin_inset space ~
39950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39959 arg "master-buffer-update"
39967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39973 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39979 \begin_inset space ~
39988 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39997 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40011 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40012 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40013 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40014 Synchronize with Output
40020 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40025 \begin_inset Graphics
40026 filename ../images/view-others.png
40028 groupId toolbarbuttons
40039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40045 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40046 View (Other Formats)
40052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40057 \begin_inset Graphics
40058 filename ../images/update-others.png
40060 groupId toolbarbuttons
40069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40075 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40076 Update (Other Formats)
40089 \begin_layout Standard
40090 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40094 \begin_layout Subsection
40098 \begin_layout Standard
40099 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40100 \begin_inset space ~
40104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40106 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40110 , the table toolbar
40111 \begin_inset Index idx
40114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40123 \begin_inset space ~
40128 manual and the math macro toolbar
40129 \begin_inset Index idx
40132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40145 \begin_layout Chapter
40146 The Document Settings
40147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40149 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40154 \begin_inset Index idx
40157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40158 Document ! Settings
40166 \begin_layout Standard
40170 \begin_inset space ~
40175 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40176 is called with the menu
40178 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40182 You can save your document settings as default with the
40184 Save as Document Defaults
40186 button in any dialog.
40187 This will create a template named
40191 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40195 \begin_layout Standard
40200 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40201 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40204 \begin_layout Standard
40205 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40206 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40207 to find the one you are looking for.
40208 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40209 the submenus of the dialog.
40211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40215 \begin_inset space \space{}
40219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40226 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40227 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40228 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40231 \begin_layout Section
40235 \begin_layout Standard
40236 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40238 Document classes are described in section
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40245 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40253 \begin_layout Standard
40257 \begin_inset space ~
40262 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40266 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40267 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40269 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40278 \begin_layout Standard
40279 Some classes use special class options by default.
40280 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40284 and you can decide to use them or not.
40285 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40286 recommended you leave them untouched.
40291 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40296 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40297 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40303 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40304 \begin_inset Newline newline
40309 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40312 \begin_inset Newline newline
40315 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40321 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40323 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40335 \begin_layout Standard
40340 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40341 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40342 document is opened without its master.
40343 This way child documents are always compilable.
40344 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40351 \begin_inset space ~
40359 \begin_layout Standard
40360 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40370 \begin_inset Index idx
40373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40374 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40380 \begin_inset Index idx
40383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40384 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40389 for cross-references, see section
40390 \begin_inset space ~
40394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40396 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40403 \begin_layout Section
40407 \begin_layout Standard
40408 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40409 Please refer to the section
40412 \begin_inset space ~
40420 \begin_inset space ~
40425 manual for details.
40428 \begin_layout Section
40432 \begin_layout Standard
40433 Modules are explained in section
40434 \begin_inset space ~
40438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40440 reference "sub:Modules"
40447 \begin_layout Section
40451 \begin_layout Standard
40453 \begin_inset space ~
40457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40459 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40466 \begin_layout Section
40470 \begin_layout Standard
40471 The document font settings are described in section
40472 \begin_inset space ~
40476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40478 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40485 \begin_layout Section
40489 \begin_layout Standard
40490 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40502 \begin_inset space ~
40507 and whether it should be a
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40515 can also be specified here.
40518 \begin_layout Standard
40519 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40521 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40523 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40526 \begin_layout Section
40530 \begin_layout Standard
40531 This dialog is described in sections
40532 \begin_inset space ~
40536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40538 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40545 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40552 \begin_layout Section
40556 \begin_layout Standard
40557 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40558 \begin_inset space ~
40562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40564 reference "sub:Margins"
40571 \begin_layout Section
40573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40575 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40580 \begin_inset Index idx
40583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40584 Language ! Encoding
40592 \begin_layout Standard
40593 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40594 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40595 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40596 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40597 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40598 known for a particular character).
40602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40603 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40608 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40613 manual for details.
40621 \begin_layout Standard
40622 If you use the option
40626 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40627 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40628 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40629 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40630 exactly one encoding.
40631 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40634 \begin_layout Standard
40635 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40636 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40637 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40638 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40639 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40640 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40645 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40646 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40647 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40648 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40649 engines to standard LaTeX.
40650 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40651 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40654 \begin_inset space ~
40661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40673 \begin_inset space ~
40680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40692 \begin_inset space ~
40698 \begin_inset space ~
40702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40704 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40709 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40713 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40716 \begin_layout Standard
40720 \begin_inset space ~
40725 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40735 The possible settings are:
40738 \begin_layout Description
40739 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40741 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40742 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40746 \begin_inset space ~
40750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40752 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40759 \begin_layout Description
40760 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40761 format you will use.
40762 In many cases this will be
40767 \begin_inset Index idx
40770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40771 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40777 If the newer package
40782 \begin_inset Index idx
40785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40786 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40791 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40792 this package will be used instead of
40799 \begin_layout Description
40801 \begin_inset space ~
40812 would be more appropriate.
40815 \begin_layout Description
40816 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40817 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40821 (for German texts), type in
40824 \begin_inset Newline newline
40829 usepackage{ngerman}
40832 \begin_layout Description
40833 None will not use a language package.
40834 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40837 \begin_layout Standard
40838 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40841 \begin_layout Description
40843 \begin_inset space ~
40847 \begin_inset space ~
40851 \begin_inset space ~
40858 , but the LaTeX-package
40863 \begin_inset Index idx
40866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40867 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40873 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40874 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40875 languages in TeX code.
40878 \begin_layout Description
40879 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40880 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40881 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40884 \begin_layout Description
40886 \begin_inset space ~
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40893 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40896 \begin_layout Description
40898 \begin_inset space ~
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40905 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40908 \begin_layout Description
40910 \begin_inset space ~
40913 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40916 \begin_layout Description
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40925 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40926 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40929 \begin_layout Description
40931 \begin_inset space ~
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40938 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40942 \begin_layout Description
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40948 \begin_inset space ~
40951 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40952 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40955 \begin_layout Description
40957 \begin_inset space ~
40961 \begin_inset space ~
40965 \begin_inset space ~
40968 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40975 \begin_layout Description
40977 \begin_inset space ~
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40985 \begin_inset space ~
40988 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40989 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40992 \begin_layout Description
40994 \begin_inset space ~
40998 \begin_inset space ~
41001 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41002 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41003 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41014 \begin_layout Description
41016 \begin_inset space ~
41020 \begin_inset space ~
41023 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41024 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41025 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
41026 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41027 \begin_inset space ~
41031 \begin_inset space ~
41037 \begin_layout Description
41039 \begin_inset space ~
41043 \begin_inset space ~
41046 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41049 \begin_layout Description
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41055 \begin_inset space ~
41058 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41061 \begin_layout Description
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41067 \begin_inset space ~
41070 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41073 \begin_layout Description
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41078 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41081 \begin_layout Description
41083 \begin_inset space ~
41086 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41089 \begin_layout Description
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41095 \begin_inset space ~
41098 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41101 \begin_layout Description
41103 \begin_inset space ~
41107 \begin_inset space ~
41113 \begin_layout Description
41115 \begin_inset space ~
41119 \begin_inset space ~
41122 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41125 \begin_layout Description
41127 \begin_inset space ~
41131 \begin_inset space ~
41137 \begin_layout Description
41139 \begin_inset space ~
41143 \begin_inset space ~
41146 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41151 \begin_inset Index idx
41154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41155 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41160 , when using this, set the document language to
41165 \begin_layout Description
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41174 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41178 , when using this, set the document language to
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41187 \begin_layout Description
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41196 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41201 \begin_inset Index idx
41204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41205 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41210 , when using this, set the document language to
41215 \begin_layout Description
41217 \begin_inset space ~
41221 \begin_inset space ~
41224 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41228 , when using this, set the document language to
41233 \begin_layout Description
41235 \begin_inset space ~
41239 \begin_inset space ~
41242 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41246 , when using this, set the document language to
41251 \begin_layout Description
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41256 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41259 \begin_layout Description
41261 \begin_inset space ~
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41272 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41275 \begin_layout Description
41277 \begin_inset space ~
41281 \begin_inset space ~
41285 \begin_inset space ~
41288 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41289 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41290 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41293 \begin_layout Description
41295 \begin_inset space ~
41299 \begin_inset space ~
41305 \begin_layout Description
41307 \begin_inset space ~
41311 \begin_inset space ~
41314 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41315 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41318 \begin_layout Description
41320 \begin_inset space ~
41324 \begin_inset space ~
41327 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41332 \begin_inset Index idx
41335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41336 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41341 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41344 \begin_layout Description
41346 \begin_inset space ~
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41353 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41361 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41366 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41368 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41371 \begin_layout Description
41373 \begin_inset space ~
41377 \begin_inset space ~
41380 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41385 \begin_inset Index idx
41388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41389 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41394 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41397 \begin_layout Description
41399 \begin_inset space ~
41402 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41407 \begin_inset Index idx
41410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41411 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41417 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41421 \begin_layout Description
41423 \begin_inset space ~
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41431 \begin_inset space ~
41434 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41435 \begin_inset space ~
41441 \begin_layout Description
41443 \begin_inset space ~
41447 \begin_inset space ~
41451 \begin_inset space ~
41454 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41455 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41456 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41460 \begin_layout Description
41462 \begin_inset space ~
41466 \begin_inset space ~
41470 \begin_inset space ~
41473 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41474 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41477 \begin_layout Section
41479 \begin_inset Index idx
41482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41489 \begin_inset Index idx
41492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41499 \begin_inset Index idx
41502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41503 Color ! Shaded boxes
41509 \begin_inset Index idx
41512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41513 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41521 \begin_layout Standard
41522 Here you can alter the font color for the
41526 (default: black), for
41529 \begin_inset space ~
41534 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41538 (default: white) and for
41541 \begin_inset space ~
41551 sets the color back to the default.
41554 \begin_layout Standard
41555 Clicking any button showing
41563 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41564 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41565 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41566 later more quickly.
41569 \begin_layout Standard
41570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41574 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41576 \begin_inset space ~
41579 out note appears blue in the output.)
41587 \begin_layout Standard
41588 Note, if you change the
41591 \begin_inset space ~
41596 font color and use the option
41599 \begin_inset space ~
41604 in the document settings under
41607 \begin_inset space ~
41612 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41613 \begin_inset space ~
41617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41619 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41626 \begin_layout Standard
41627 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41633 \begin_layout Standard
41637 \begin_inset space ~
41646 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41648 \begin_inset space ~
41651 Code after a forced page break:
41654 \begin_layout Itemize
41655 For the page color:
41656 \begin_inset Newline newline
41663 pagecolor{color name}
41666 \begin_layout Itemize
41667 For the text color:
41668 \begin_inset Newline newline
41678 \begin_layout Standard
41679 You are restricted to one of
41715 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41722 \begin_inset space ~
41728 \begin_inset Newline newline
41731 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41732 names to refer to them:
41735 \begin_layout Itemize
41741 \begin_inset Newline newline
41746 page_backgroundcolor
41749 \begin_layout Itemize
41753 \begin_inset space ~
41759 \begin_inset Newline newline
41767 \begin_layout Itemize
41771 \begin_inset space ~
41777 \begin_inset Newline newline
41785 \begin_layout Itemize
41789 \begin_inset space ~
41795 \begin_inset Newline newline
41803 \begin_layout Standard
41804 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41808 Cells of the Embedded
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41815 \begin_layout Section
41819 \begin_layout Standard
41820 Here you can adjust the
41824 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41828 as described in section
41829 \begin_inset space ~
41833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41835 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41842 \begin_layout Section
41846 \begin_layout Standard
41847 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41852 \begin_inset Index idx
41855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41856 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41866 \begin_inset Index idx
41869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41870 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41878 Sectioned bibliography
41880 using the LaTeX package
41885 \begin_inset Index idx
41888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41889 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41894 and you can select a
41898 for the generation of the bibliography.
41899 For a further description see section
41900 \begin_inset space ~
41904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41906 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41913 \begin_layout Section
41917 \begin_layout Standard
41918 Here you can define the
41922 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41924 \begin_inset space ~
41928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41930 reference "sec:Index"
41937 \begin_layout Section
41941 \begin_layout Standard
41942 The PDF properties are explained in section
41943 \begin_inset space ~
41947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41949 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41956 \begin_layout Section
41960 \begin_layout Standard
41961 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41966 \begin_inset Index idx
41969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41970 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41980 \begin_inset Index idx
41983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41984 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41994 \begin_inset Index idx
41997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41998 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
42008 \begin_inset Index idx
42011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42012 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
42017 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42020 \begin_layout Description
42021 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
42022 ensure that you have enabled
42025 \begin_inset space ~
42033 \begin_layout Description
42034 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42037 \begin_inset space ~
42049 \begin_layout Description
42050 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42061 \begin_layout Description
42062 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42064 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42073 \begin_layout Section
42077 \begin_layout Standard
42078 The float placement options are described in the section
42081 \begin_inset space ~
42089 \begin_inset space ~
42097 \begin_layout Section
42101 \begin_layout Standard
42102 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42104 Program Code Listings
42109 \begin_inset space ~
42117 \begin_layout Section
42121 \begin_layout Standard
42122 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42130 set to be used and set the
42135 The itemize environment is described in section
42136 \begin_inset space ~
42140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42142 reference "sec:Itemize"
42149 \begin_layout Standard
42150 You can furthermore specify a
42153 \begin_inset space ~
42158 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
42159 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42166 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42172 \begin_inset space \space{}
42176 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42186 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42187 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42190 \begin_layout Standard
42191 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42199 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42202 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42203 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42205 \begin_inset space ~
42211 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42215 usepackage{textcomp}
42218 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42222 usepackage{amssymb}
42232 \begin_layout Section
42236 \begin_layout Standard
42237 Branches are described in section
42238 \begin_inset space ~
42242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42244 reference "sec:Branches"
42251 \begin_layout Section
42253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42255 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42262 \begin_layout Standard
42263 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42266 \begin_layout Description
42268 \begin_inset space ~
42272 \begin_inset space ~
42275 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42295 View Master Document
42296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42303 Update Master Document
42304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42311 menu or the toolbar.
42312 The default is set in
42314 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42315 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42317 \begin_inset space ~
42320 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42324 \begin_inset space ~
42328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42330 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42337 \begin_layout Description
42339 \begin_inset space ~
42343 \begin_inset space ~
42346 Output settings for the menu
42348 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42350 \begin_inset space ~
42356 For a detailed description see section
42358 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42363 \begin_inset space ~
42371 \begin_layout Description
42373 \begin_inset space ~
42377 \begin_inset space ~
42380 Options offers settings for the export format
42386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42399 \begin_inset space ~
42404 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42405 \begin_inset space ~
42408 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42412 \begin_inset space ~
42417 settings are described in detail in section
42419 Math Output in XHTML
42424 \begin_inset space ~
42433 \begin_inset space ~
42437 \begin_inset space ~
42442 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42445 \begin_layout Section
42450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42460 \begin_layout Standard
42461 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42462 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42463 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42464 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42468 \begin_layout Standard
42469 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42470 \begin_inset space ~
42474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42476 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42483 \begin_layout Chapter
42489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42491 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42496 \begin_inset Index idx
42499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42508 \begin_layout Standard
42509 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42511 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42515 It has the following submenus.
42518 \begin_layout Section
42522 \begin_layout Subsection
42526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42527 User Interface File
42528 \begin_inset Index idx
42531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42532 Customization ! of toolbars
42538 \begin_inset Index idx
42541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42542 Customization ! of menus
42550 \begin_layout Standard
42551 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42552 interface (ui) file.
42553 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42561 \begin_layout Description
42566 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42569 \begin_layout Description
42576 the menu entries in popup context menus
42579 \begin_layout Description
42584 specifies the toolbar buttons
42587 \begin_layout Standard
42588 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42589 and edit the entries.
42592 \begin_layout Standard
42593 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42605 entries must be finished with an explicit
42630 and in the case of the
42631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42643 The syntax for the entries is:
42646 \begin_layout Standard
42647 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42675 \begin_layout Standard
42677 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42680 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42682 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42695 \begin_inset space ~
42703 \begin_layout Standard
42704 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42710 \begin_layout Standard
42711 For example, assuming you use the menu
42713 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42716 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42720 \begin_layout Standard
42721 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42745 \begin_layout Standard
42747 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42762 to have the sixth bookmark.
42765 \begin_layout Standard
42769 \begin_inset space ~
42774 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42775 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42776 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42779 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42786 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42790 \begin_layout Standard
42793 Enable tool tips in main work area
42795 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42799 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42803 \begin_layout Standard
42806 Restore window layouts and geometries
42808 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42809 in the last LyX session.
42812 \begin_layout Standard
42815 Restore cursor positions
42817 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42821 \begin_layout Standard
42824 Load opened files from last session
42826 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42829 \begin_layout Standard
42832 Clear all session information
42834 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42835 of last opened documents, etc.).
42838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42842 name "sub:Backup documents"
42847 \begin_inset Index idx
42850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42859 \begin_layout Standard
42862 Backup original documents when saving
42864 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42865 it was saved the last time.
42866 It is stored in the
42869 \begin_inset space ~
42875 \begin_inset space ~
42879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42881 reference "sec:Paths"
42885 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42888 \begin_inset space ~
42894 The backup file has the file extension
42895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42909 \begin_layout Standard
42912 Backup documents, every
42914 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42917 \begin_layout Standard
42920 Save documents compressed by default
42922 always saves files in a compressed format.
42925 \begin_layout Standard
42930 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42933 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42935 \begin_inset space ~
42943 \begin_layout Standard
42946 Open documents in tabs
42948 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42951 \begin_layout Standard
42956 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42968 reference "sec:Paths"
42972 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42978 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42980 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42983 \begin_layout Standard
42986 Single close-tab button
42988 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42991 \begin_inset Graphics
42992 filename ../images/closetab.png
42999 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43000 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43003 \begin_layout Standard
43004 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43012 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
43020 \begin_layout Subsection
43022 \begin_inset Index idx
43025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43034 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
43041 \begin_layout Standard
43042 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
43045 \begin_layout Standard
43046 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43054 This section only deals with the fonts
43059 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43062 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43063 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43074 \begin_layout Standard
43075 By default, LyX uses
43091 (depends on the system) as its
43094 \begin_inset space ~
43110 \begin_layout Standard
43111 You can change the font size with the
43118 \begin_layout Standard
43123 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43128 points have the size of 1
43129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43133 \begin_inset space ~
43137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43139 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43144 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43149 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43150 \begin_inset space ~
43154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43156 reference "sub:Document-Font"
43163 \begin_layout Standard
43166 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43168 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
43169 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43170 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43171 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43173 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43174 \begin_inset space ~
43180 \begin_layout Subsection
43182 \begin_inset Index idx
43185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43192 \begin_inset Index idx
43195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43204 \begin_layout Standard
43205 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43206 the list and selecting the
43213 \begin_layout Standard
43214 By checking the option
43218 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43221 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43222 \begin_inset space ~
43226 \begin_inset space ~
43231 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43234 \begin_layout Subsection
43236 \begin_inset Index idx
43239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43248 \begin_layout Standard
43249 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43252 \begin_layout Standard
43257 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43258 This feature is described in section
43259 \begin_inset space ~
43263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43265 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43272 \begin_layout Standard
43273 Checking the option
43276 \begin_inset space ~
43280 \begin_inset space ~
43284 \begin_inset space ~
43289 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43292 \begin_layout Section
43294 \begin_inset Index idx
43297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43306 \begin_layout Subsection
43310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43314 \begin_layout Standard
43317 Cursor follows scrollbar
43319 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43323 \begin_layout Standard
43324 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43325 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43326 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43329 \begin_layout Standard
43332 Scroll below end of document
43334 is self-explanatory.
43337 \begin_layout Standard
43338 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43345 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43347 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43348 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43351 \begin_layout Standard
43354 Sort environments alphabetically
43356 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43359 \begin_layout Standard
43362 Group environments by their category
43364 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43367 \begin_layout Standard
43372 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43383 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43387 \begin_layout Standard
43388 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43393 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43394 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43398 \begin_layout Subsection
43400 \begin_inset Index idx
43403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43410 \begin_inset Index idx
43413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43414 Settings ! Shortcuts
43422 \begin_layout Standard
43427 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43428 Several binding files are available, among them:
43431 \begin_layout Description
43432 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43435 \begin_layout Description
43436 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43448 \begin_layout Description
43449 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43460 \begin_layout Standard
43461 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43466 , and binding files for special languages.
43467 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43472 \begin_inset space \space{}
43476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43484 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43488 \begin_layout Standard
43489 Some binding files, like
43493 , only have a limited scope.
43494 When looking at the end of the file
43498 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43501 \begin_layout Standard
43505 \begin_inset space ~
43509 \begin_inset space ~
43514 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43515 in the selected key binding file.
43518 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43522 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43527 \begin_inset Index idx
43530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43531 Key Bindings ! Editing
43539 \begin_layout Standard
43540 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43541 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43542 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43545 Show key-bindings containing
43548 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43549 Insert there for example as keyword
43550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43557 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43558 functions that contain
43559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43567 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43568 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43572 that you will find in the
43579 \begin_layout Standard
43580 For example, to add the shortcut
43588 , select the function and press the
43593 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43594 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43597 \begin_layout Standard
43598 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43599 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43600 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43601 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43602 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43607 \begin_layout Standard
43608 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43611 \begin_layout Standard
43612 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43614 The syntax of the entries is:
43617 \begin_layout Standard
43623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43641 \begin_layout Subsection
43643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43645 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43650 \begin_inset Index idx
43653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43660 \begin_inset Index idx
43663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43664 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43672 \begin_layout Standard
43673 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43674 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43675 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43676 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43679 \begin_inset space ~
43683 \begin_inset space ~
43688 and select the keyboard map file named
43695 \begin_layout Standard
43704 keyboard map and, if you use the
43708 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43711 arg "keymap-primary"
43717 arg "keymap-secondary"
43720 respectively or toggle between them with
43723 arg "keymap-toggle"
43729 \begin_layout Standard
43730 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43738 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43747 \begin_layout Standard
43748 You can also specify the mouse
43750 Wheel scrolling speed
43753 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43757 \begin_layout Standard
43765 \begin_inset space ~
43769 \begin_inset space ~
43774 you can select a key for zooming.
43775 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43778 \begin_layout Subsection
43782 \begin_layout Standard
43783 Input completion is described in section
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43790 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43797 \begin_layout Section
43799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43806 \begin_inset Index idx
43809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43816 \begin_inset Index idx
43819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43828 \begin_layout Standard
43829 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43831 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43834 \begin_layout Description
43836 \begin_inset space ~
43839 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43840 It is the default when you
43851 \begin_inset space ~
43859 \begin_layout Description
43861 \begin_inset space ~
43864 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43866 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43868 \begin_inset space ~
43872 \begin_inset space ~
43880 \begin_layout Description
43882 \begin_inset space ~
43885 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43891 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43895 \begin_inset Newline newline
43899 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43911 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43919 \begin_layout Description
43921 \begin_inset space ~
43925 \begin_inset Index idx
43928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43934 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43935 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43936 \begin_inset space ~
43940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43942 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43950 will be used to save the backups.
43951 \begin_inset Newline newline
43954 Backup files have the ending
43955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43965 \begin_layout Description
43970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43978 \begin_inset space ~
43981 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43982 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43983 \begin_inset Newline newline
43990 You add a BibTeX-database
43995 You can edit this file with the program
44004 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
44007 \begin_inset space ~
44013 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44018 and click on the LyX-symbol.
44019 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44025 and LyX need to be running the same time.
44026 \begin_inset Newline newline
44029 The pipe is also used for the
44034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44040 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44045 \begin_inset Newline newline
44048 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44049 \begin_inset Newline newline
44065 \begin_layout Description
44067 \begin_inset space ~
44070 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44073 \begin_layout Description
44075 \begin_inset space ~
44078 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44079 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44080 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44083 \begin_layout Description
44085 \begin_inset space ~
44088 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44094 You only need to specify it if you are using
44098 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44104 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44108 \begin_layout Description
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44113 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44114 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
44115 where to find it on the system.
44116 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
44117 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44126 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44127 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44130 \begin_layout Description
44132 \begin_inset space ~
44135 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44136 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
44138 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44140 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44141 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44142 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44143 scanned for the input files.
44144 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44145 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
44146 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44147 compilation may fail for some documents.
44150 \begin_layout Section
44154 \begin_layout Standard
44155 Here you can insert your
44164 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44166 \begin_inset space ~
44170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44172 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44176 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44179 \begin_layout Section
44181 \begin_inset Index idx
44184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44185 Language ! Settings
44191 \begin_inset Index idx
44194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44195 Settings ! Language
44203 \begin_layout Subsection
44205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44207 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44214 \begin_layout Description
44216 \begin_inset space ~
44220 \begin_inset space ~
44223 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44224 You can find its actual translation status here:
44225 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44227 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44234 \begin_layout Description
44236 \begin_inset space ~
44239 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44241 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44242 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44259 The most widespread language package is
44264 \begin_inset Index idx
44267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44268 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44273 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44274 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44275 alternative language package
44280 \begin_inset Index idx
44283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44284 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44289 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44290 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44296 The available selections are described in section
44297 \begin_inset space ~
44301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44303 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44310 \begin_layout Description
44312 \begin_inset space ~
44315 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44316 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44317 An example is the start command
44323 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44328 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44343 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44348 \begin_layout Description
44350 \begin_inset space ~
44358 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44359 command toggles the package on and off.
44362 \begin_layout Description
44364 \begin_inset space ~
44368 \begin_inset space ~
44371 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44375 \begin_layout Description
44377 \begin_inset space ~
44381 \begin_inset space ~
44384 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44385 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44386 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44387 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44394 \begin_layout Description
44396 \begin_inset space ~
44399 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44401 When this option is not set, the
44404 \begin_inset space ~
44409 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44410 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44413 \begin_inset space ~
44421 \begin_layout Description
44423 \begin_inset space ~
44429 \begin_inset space ~
44435 When it is not set, the
44438 \begin_inset space ~
44443 is set to the end of the document.
44446 \begin_layout Description
44448 \begin_inset space ~
44452 \begin_inset space ~
44455 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44456 language will be underlined in blue.
44459 \begin_layout Description
44461 \begin_inset space ~
44465 \begin_inset space ~
44468 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44469 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44472 \begin_layout Description
44474 \begin_inset space ~
44477 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44478 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44479 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44480 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44483 \begin_layout Subsection
44487 \begin_layout Standard
44488 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44489 \begin_inset space ~
44493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44495 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44502 \begin_layout Section
44506 \begin_layout Subsection
44510 \begin_layout Description
44512 \begin_inset space ~
44516 \begin_inset space ~
44519 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44522 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44523 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44525 \begin_inset space ~
44531 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44534 \begin_layout Description
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44540 \begin_inset Index idx
44543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44550 \begin_inset Index idx
44553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44554 Settings ! Date format
44559 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44560 \begin_inset Newline newline
44564 \begin_inset Flex URL
44567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44569 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44575 \begin_inset Newline newline
44578 For example the format
44579 \begin_inset Newline newline
44583 \begin_inset Newline newline
44586 prints the date as day/month/year.
44589 \begin_layout Description
44591 \begin_inset space ~
44595 \begin_inset space ~
44598 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44601 \begin_layout Description
44603 \begin_inset space ~
44606 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44608 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44610 \begin_inset space ~
44616 For a detailed description see section
44618 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44623 \begin_inset space ~
44631 \begin_layout Subsection
44633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44640 \begin_inset Index idx
44643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44650 \begin_inset Index idx
44653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44662 \begin_layout Description
44664 \begin_inset space ~
44667 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44672 The name will be used when the
44677 \begin_inset Newline newline
44681 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44689 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44697 \begin_layout Description
44699 \begin_inset space ~
44702 command is the command LyX
44703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44710 LaTeX uses for printing.
44718 \begin_layout Description
44720 \begin_inset space ~
44724 \begin_inset space ~
44727 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44728 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44729 of the program that provides the
44736 \begin_layout Description
44738 \begin_inset space ~
44742 \begin_inset space ~
44746 \begin_inset space ~
44749 printer This option works only for the
44754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44766 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44767 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44770 \begin_layout Subsection
44775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44785 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44790 \begin_inset Index idx
44793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44802 \begin_layout Description
44804 \begin_inset space ~
44811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44819 \begin_inset space ~
44823 \begin_inset space ~
44826 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44831 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44852 are used for Cyrillic.
44853 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44866 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44867 LyX sets up in the background.
44868 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44871 \begin_layout Description
44873 \begin_inset space ~
44877 \begin_inset space ~
44880 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44885 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44888 \begin_layout Description
44890 \begin_inset space ~
44894 \begin_inset space ~
44898 \begin_inset space ~
44902 \begin_inset space ~
44905 options They only have an effect when the program
44909 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44912 \begin_layout Standard
44913 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44914 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44915 manuals of the applications.
44918 \begin_layout Description
44920 \begin_inset space ~
44923 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44924 \begin_inset space ~
44928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44930 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44937 \begin_layout Description
44939 \begin_inset space ~
44942 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44943 \begin_inset space ~
44947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44949 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44956 \begin_layout Description
44958 \begin_inset space ~
44961 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44962 \begin_inset space ~
44966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44968 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44975 \begin_layout Description
44980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44988 \begin_inset space ~
44991 command Command for the program
44995 that is described in the section
45001 Additional Features
45006 \begin_layout Standard
45007 There are additionally the following options:
45010 \begin_layout Description
45012 \begin_inset space ~
45016 \begin_inset space ~
45020 \begin_inset space ~
45024 \begin_inset space ~
45028 \begin_inset space ~
45031 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45049 to separate folders.
45050 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
45051 \begin_inset Index idx
45054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45061 \begin_inset Index idx
45064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45073 \begin_layout Description
45075 \begin_inset space ~
45079 \begin_inset space ~
45083 \begin_inset space ~
45087 \begin_inset space ~
45091 \begin_inset space ~
45095 \begin_inset space ~
45098 changes Removes all manually set
45104 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45105 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45107 \begin_inset space ~
45112 dialog when changing the document class.
45115 \begin_layout Section
45117 \begin_inset space ~
45121 \begin_inset Index idx
45124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45133 \begin_layout Subsection
45135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45137 name "sub:Converters"
45142 \begin_inset Index idx
45145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45154 \begin_layout Standard
45155 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45156 from one format to another.
45157 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45158 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45165 \begin_inset space ~
45170 field and press the
45175 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45179 \begin_inset space ~
45184 drop-down list, modify the
45188 field and press the
45195 \begin_layout Standard
45198 Converter File Cache
45204 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45206 Maximum Age (in days
45209 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45210 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45213 \begin_layout Standard
45214 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45215 definition, is described in the section
45226 \begin_layout Subsection
45228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45230 name "sec:File-Formats"
45235 \begin_inset Index idx
45238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45245 \begin_inset Index idx
45248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45257 \begin_layout Standard
45258 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45267 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45270 \begin_layout Standard
45271 You can also define the
45273 Default output format
45275 that is used when you use
45277 View, Update, View Master Document
45281 Update Master Document
45287 menu or the toolbar.
45290 \begin_layout Standard
45291 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45302 \begin_layout Standard
45303 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45304 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45305 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45306 This is done by specifying a
45311 More about this is described in the section
45322 \begin_layout Chapter
45323 Units available in LyX
45324 \begin_inset Index idx
45327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45336 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45343 \begin_layout Standard
45345 \begin_inset space ~
45349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45351 reference "tab:Units"
45355 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45358 \begin_layout Standard
45359 \begin_inset Float table
45365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45366 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45384 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45392 \begin_inset Tabular
45393 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45394 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45396 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45547 scaled point (65536
45548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45608 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45612 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45663 % of original image width
45670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45877 \begin_layout Chapter
45879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45881 name "chap:Credits"
45888 \begin_layout Standard
45889 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45890 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45893 \begin_layout Itemize
45896 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45899 \begin_layout Itemize
45905 \begin_layout Itemize
45911 \begin_layout Itemize
45917 \begin_layout Itemize
45923 \begin_layout Itemize
45929 \begin_layout Itemize
45935 \begin_layout Itemize
45941 \begin_layout Itemize
45944 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45947 \begin_layout Itemize
45953 \begin_layout Itemize
45959 \begin_layout Itemize
45965 \begin_layout Itemize
45971 \begin_layout Itemize
45977 \begin_layout Itemize
45983 \begin_layout Itemize
45989 \begin_layout Itemize
45995 \begin_layout Itemize
45997 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46006 \begin_layout Standard
46007 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46010 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46017 \begin_layout Bibliography
46018 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46019 LatexCommand bibitem
46026 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46029 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46034 \begin_inset Newline newline
46038 \begin_inset Flex URL
46041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46043 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46051 \begin_layout Bibliography
46052 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46053 LatexCommand bibitem
46054 key "latexcompanion"
46058 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46060 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
46063 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46066 \begin_layout Bibliography
46067 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46068 LatexCommand bibitem
46073 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46076 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
46079 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46082 \begin_layout Bibliography
46083 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46084 LatexCommand bibitem
46091 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
46094 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46097 \begin_layout Bibliography
46098 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46099 LatexCommand bibitem
46111 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46114 \begin_layout Bibliography
46115 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46116 LatexCommand bibitem
46122 \begin_inset Newline newline
46126 \begin_inset Flex URL
46129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46131 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46139 \begin_layout Bibliography
46140 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46141 LatexCommand bibitem
46147 \begin_inset Newline newline
46151 \begin_inset Flex URL
46154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46156 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46164 \begin_layout Bibliography
46165 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46166 LatexCommand bibitem
46172 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46174 name "Documentation"
46175 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46184 \begin_inset Newline newline
46188 \begin_inset Flex URL
46191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46193 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46201 \begin_layout Bibliography
46202 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46203 LatexCommand bibitem
46209 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46211 name "Documentation"
46212 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46216 how to use the program
46221 \begin_inset Newline newline
46225 \begin_inset Flex URL
46228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46230 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46238 \begin_layout Bibliography
46239 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46240 LatexCommand bibitem
46246 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46248 name "Documentation"
46249 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46258 \begin_inset Newline newline
46262 \begin_inset Flex URL
46265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46267 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46275 \begin_layout Bibliography
46276 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46277 LatexCommand bibitem
46283 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46285 name "Documentation"
46286 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46295 \begin_inset Newline newline
46299 \begin_inset Flex URL
46302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46304 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46312 \begin_layout Bibliography
46313 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46314 LatexCommand bibitem
46320 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46322 name "Documentation"
46323 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46327 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46328 \begin_inset Newline newline
46332 \begin_inset Flex URL
46335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46337 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46345 \begin_layout Bibliography
46346 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46347 LatexCommand bibitem
46353 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46355 name "Documentation"
46356 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46360 of the LaTeX-package
46365 \begin_inset Index idx
46368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46369 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46375 \begin_inset Newline newline
46379 \begin_inset Flex URL
46382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46384 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46392 \begin_layout Bibliography
46393 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46394 LatexCommand bibitem
46400 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46402 name "Documentation"
46403 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46407 of the LaTeX-package
46412 \begin_inset Index idx
46415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46416 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46422 \begin_inset Newline newline
46426 \begin_inset Flex URL
46429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46431 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46439 \begin_layout Bibliography
46440 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46441 LatexCommand bibitem
46447 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46449 name "Documentation"
46450 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46454 of the LaTeX-package
46459 \begin_inset Index idx
46462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46463 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46469 \begin_inset Newline newline
46473 \begin_inset Flex URL
46476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46478 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46486 \begin_layout Bibliography
46487 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46488 LatexCommand bibitem
46494 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46496 name "Documentation"
46497 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46501 of the LaTeX-package
46506 \begin_inset Index idx
46509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46510 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46516 \begin_inset Newline newline
46520 \begin_inset Flex URL
46523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46525 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46533 \begin_layout Bibliography
46534 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46535 LatexCommand bibitem
46541 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46543 name "Documentation"
46544 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46548 of the LaTeX-package
46553 \begin_inset Index idx
46556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46557 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46563 \begin_inset Newline newline
46567 \begin_inset Flex URL
46570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46572 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46580 \begin_layout Bibliography
46581 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46582 LatexCommand bibitem
46588 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46590 name "Documentation"
46591 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46595 of the LaTeX-package
46600 \begin_inset Index idx
46603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46604 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46610 \begin_inset Newline newline
46614 \begin_inset Flex URL
46617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46619 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46627 \begin_layout Bibliography
46628 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46629 LatexCommand bibitem
46635 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46637 name "Documentation"
46638 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46642 of the LaTeX-package
46647 \begin_inset Index idx
46650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46651 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46657 \begin_inset Newline newline
46661 \begin_inset Flex URL
46664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46666 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46674 \begin_layout Bibliography
46675 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46676 LatexCommand bibitem
46682 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46685 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46689 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46690 \begin_inset Newline newline
46694 \begin_inset Flex URL
46697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46699 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46707 \begin_layout Bibliography
46708 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46709 LatexCommand bibitem
46715 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46718 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46722 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46723 \begin_inset Newline newline
46727 \begin_inset Flex URL
46730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46732 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46740 \begin_layout Bibliography
46741 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46742 LatexCommand bibitem
46748 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46751 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46755 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46756 \begin_inset Newline newline
46760 \begin_inset Flex URL
46763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46765 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46773 \begin_layout Bibliography
46774 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46775 LatexCommand bibitem
46781 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46784 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46788 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46789 \begin_inset Newline newline
46793 \begin_inset Flex URL
46796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46798 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46806 \begin_layout Bibliography
46807 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46808 LatexCommand bibitem
46814 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46817 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46821 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46822 \begin_inset Newline newline
46826 \begin_inset Flex URL
46829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46831 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46839 \begin_layout Bibliography
46840 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46841 LatexCommand bibitem
46847 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46850 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46854 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46855 \begin_inset Newline newline
46859 \begin_inset Flex URL
46862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46864 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46872 \begin_layout Bibliography
46873 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46874 LatexCommand bibitem
46880 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46883 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46887 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46888 \begin_inset Newline newline
46892 \begin_inset Flex URL
46895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46897 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46905 \begin_layout Bibliography
46906 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46907 LatexCommand bibitem
46913 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46916 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46920 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46921 \begin_inset Newline newline
46925 \begin_inset Flex URL
46928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46930 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46938 \begin_layout Bibliography
46939 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46940 LatexCommand bibitem
46946 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46949 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46953 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46954 \begin_inset Newline newline
46958 \begin_inset Flex URL
46961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46963 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46971 \begin_layout Bibliography
46972 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46973 LatexCommand bibitem
46979 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46982 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46986 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46987 \begin_inset Newline newline
46991 \begin_inset Flex URL
46994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46996 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47004 \begin_layout Bibliography
47005 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47006 LatexCommand bibitem
47012 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47015 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47019 about new features in
47024 \begin_inset Newline newline
47028 \begin_inset Flex URL
47031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47033 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47041 \begin_layout Standard
47042 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47076 \begin_inset Note Note
47079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47086 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47087 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47088 bibliography is the second one:
47096 \begin_layout Standard
47097 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47098 LatexCommand bibtex
47099 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47100 options "biblio/alphadin"
47107 \begin_layout Standard
47108 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
47111 \begin_layout Standard
47112 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47113 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47119 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47120 LatexCommand printindex